D-Line Contactors,
Overload Relays and Accessories
Class 8502
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Mini-Contactors
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 35
Auxiliary Contacts, Timers and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 - 52
Replacement Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 - 60
Dimensions and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 - 66
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 - 69
Overload Relays
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 - 75
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 - 79
Dimensions, Mounting, and Schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 - 84
Low Consumption DC Coil Mini-Contactors
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 - 89
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 - 93
Auxiliary Contacts, Timers, and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 - 96
Dimensions and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Capacitor Switching Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 -103
Plate-Mounted Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 -105
Wye-Delta Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 - 111
Enclosed Contactors and Starters
Horsepower Rated Devices for North American Applications . . . . . . . 112 - 119
Kilowatt Rated Devices for International Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 - 141
Definitions and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
General Information
Introduction
The Telemecanique family of IEC style contactors and starters are the largest selling motor control
devices in the world. When the application calls for world class products, select the Telemecanique IEC
style contactors and starters for products that are marketed and sold in over 160 countries. Most devices
are UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked, meet IEC 947 standards and are approved by most other
international approved agencies.
The Telemecanique family of IEC style contactors and starters include the following:
K-Line mini-contactors and overload relays are for general purpose starting and protection in a small
package for loads up to 12 Amps or resistive loads up to 20 Amps.
D-Line contactors and overload relays offer the largest offering of accessories for maximum flexibility
in customer applications and automated systems up to 150 motor full-load Amps or 200 Amp resistive
loads.
F-Line contactors and solid state overload relays are for inductive loads up to 800 Amps or resistive
loads up to 1350 Amps and share common accessories with the D-Line.
GV manual starters provide manual isolation, manual motor control and overcurrent protection in one
compact unit. They are approved for Group Motor Installations when used alone or with D-Line
contactors.
Integral self-protected starters combine all the functions of a disconnect switch, circuit breaker,
contactor and overload relay in one coordinated unit to reduce required panel space by as much as 60%
and reduce installation and wiring time.
Selection of Telemecanique K-Line, D-Line and F-Line contactors are based on Utilization Categories,
a combination of application and duty cycle rates defined by the following:
• The type of application (inductive motor loads or resistive loads)
• The conditions under which making or breaking current takes place (motor starting or running,
reversing, plugging or jogging, locked rotor or stalled motor)
• Number of making and breaking operations (or cycles) required for the life of the contactor
When specifying Telemecanique IEC contactors and starters refer to the following Square D documents:
Catalog No. 8502CT9801
Catalog No. 8502CT9703
Catalog No. 8502CT9704
Catalog No. 8502CT9702
Catalog No. 2520CT9501
Catalog No. 8539CT9201
IEC Contactors Selection Guide
K-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
F-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
GV2/GV3 Manual Starters and AK5 Panel Busbar System
Integral Self-Protected Starters
2
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
General Information
The D-Line Contactors and Overload Relays are the largest selling line of contactors and
starters in the world. They offer high reliability with long mechanical and electrical life and the
most complete line of accessories in the industry.
Contactor ratings
D-Line contactors and overload relays are available in eleven contactor ratings for the USA market for
inductive motor applications up to 150 full load Amps and resistive loads up to 200 Amps. They offer
motor control and overload protection for motors rated up to 100 horsepower at 480 VAC or 125
horsepower at 600 VAC.
3-pole and 4-pole contactor versions available.
Most contactors include built-in auxiliary contacts.
All screw connections have IP20 rated Finger-safe terminals with both North American and
International terminal markings.
D-Line contactors can be panel mounted with screws or DIN rail mounted.
Available in 3-pole contactor versions with built-in auxiliary contact for holding circuit or 4-pole
contactor versions
Easily installed Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks with serrated wiping action
Front mount dust tight auxiliary contact blocks
Pneumatic time delay blocks
Transient voltage surge suppressors
Interface modules and electronic timers
Mechanical latching blocks
Control circuit flexibility
The D-Line contactors are available with AC or DC operating coils. Several devices utilize a low
consumption DC coil with built-in transient suppression for operation with a low level DC signal from a
computer or PLC without need for an interposing relay.
Overload relays
Class 10 or Class 20 bimetallic overload relays are available up to 140 Amps. They are ambient
compensated and are available with or without single phase sensitivity for phase unbalance and phase
loss protection. New solid state overload relays are available for 90 to 150 Amp applications. Both
bimetallic and solid-state overload relays include the following features: isolated N.C. trip contact and
N.O. alarm contacts, Manual or Automatic reset function, tamper resistant window for FLA settings and
Test trip button.
3
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics
Type LCkD and LPkD contactors
Type
LC1-D09
LC1-D12
LC1-D18
LC1-D25
LP1-D09
LP1-D12
LP1-D18
LP1-D25
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated impulse withstand voltage
(Uimp)
UL/CSA
V
690
690
690
690
To IEC 947-4-1, overvoltage
category III, degree of pollution: 3
V
1000
1000
1000
1000
Conforming to UL, CSA
V
600
600
600
600
Conforming to IEC 947
kV
8
8
8
8
Meets the essential requirements of the
LV & EMC directives
Conforming to standards
E164862
CCN NLDX
Approvals
Degree of protection c
Protective treatment
Conforming to VDE 0106
IEC 947-1, 947-4-1, NFC 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424, JEM 1038., EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1.
ASE, UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, FI, Conforming to SNCF, Sichere Trennung
recommendations
LR43364
Class 3211 04
Power connections
Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X
Coil connections
Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X
Conforming to IEC 68
“TH”
Storage
- 60 to + 80°C (-76 to +176°F)
Ambient air temperature around the
Operation at 80 to 110% nominal control voltage
device
Permissible at nominal control voltage
- 5 to + 55°C (-23 to +131°F)
- 40 to + 70°C (-40 to +158°F)
Maximum operating altitude
Without derating
3000m (8900 ft)
Operating positions
Without derating
± 30° possible, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Conforming to UL 94
V1
V1
V1
Conforming to IEC 695-2-1
960°
960°
960°
960°
Shock resistance a
1/2 sine wave = 11ms
Contactor open
10 g
10 g
10 g
8g
Contactor closed
15 g
15 g
15 g
15 g
Vibration resistance a
5 to 300 Hz
Contactor open
2g
2g
2g
2g
Contactor closed
4g
4g
4g
4g
Flame resistance
V1
Pole characteristics
Number of poles
Rated operational current (Ie)
3
3 or 4
3
3 or 4
In AC-3, θ ≤ 55°C (131°F)
A
9
12
18
25
In AC-1, θ ≤ 40°C (104°F)
A
20
25
32
40
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Up to
V
690
690
690
690
Frequency limits
Of the operational current
Hz
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
Rated thermal current (Ith)
θ ≤ 40°C (104°F)
A
20
25
32
40
Rated making capacity (1 rms)
Conforming to IEC 947-4
A
220-380-415-440 V
Rated breaking capacity (1 rms)
Conforming to IEC 947
500 V
A
690 V
Permissible short time rating from
cold state, no current flowing for
previous 15 minutes, at θ ≤ 40 °C
Short-circuit protection
250
250
300
450
250
250
300
450
175
175
250
400
85
85
120
180
For 1 s
A
210
210
240
380
For 10 s
A
105
105
145
240
For 1 min
A
61
61
84
120
For 10 min
A
30
30
40
50
By circuit breaker
Select circuit breaker in accordance with NEC and local codes
By fuses
Maximum 400% of motor full load Amps
Average impedance per pole
A Ith and 50 Hz
mΩ
2.5
2.5
2.5
2
Power dissipation per pole for the
above operational currents
AC-3
W
0.20
0.36
0.8
1.25
AC-1
W
1.56
1.56
2.5
3.2
c Protection provided for the cable c.s.a. indicated on pages 10 and 11 and for cable connections.
a In the least favorable direction, without change of contact state (coil supplied at Ue).
4
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics
LC1-D32
LC1-D38
LP1-D32
LC1-D40
LC1-D50
LC1-D65
LC1-D80
LP1-D40
LP1-D50
LP1-D65
LP1-D80
LC1-D95
LC1-D115
LC1-D150
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
IEC 947-1, 947-4-1, NFC 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424, JEM 1038., EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1.
ASE, UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO,
FI, Conforming to SNCF, Sichere Trennung –
recommendations
UL, CSA
Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X
Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X except LP1-D40 to D80
“TH”
- 60 to + 80°C (-76 to +176°F)
- 5 to + 55°C (-23 to +131°F)
- 40 to + 70°C (-40 to +158°F)
3000m (8900 ft)
± 30° possible, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
960°
960°
960°
960°
960°
960°
960°
960°
960°
8g
8g
8g
8g
8g
8g
8g
6g
6g
15 g
10 g
10 g
10 g
10 g
10 g
10 g
15 g
15 g
2g
2g
2g
2g
2g
2g
2g
2g
2g
4g
4g
3g
3g
3g
3g
3g
4g
4g
3
3
3 or 4
3
3 or 4
3 or 4
3
3 or 4
3
32
38
40
50
65
80
95
115
150
50
50
60
80
80
125
125
200
200
690
690
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
25 to 400
50
50
60
80
80
125
125
200
200
550
–
800
900
1000
1100
–
–
–
550
–
800
900
1000
1100
–
–
–
450
–
800
900
1000
1100
–
–
–
180
–
400
400
630
640
–
–
–
430
430
720
810
900
990
1100
1100
1400
260
310
320
400
520
640
800
950
1200
138
150
165
208
260
320
400
550
580
60
60
72
84
110
135
135
250
250
Select circuit breaker in accordance with NEC and local codes
Maximum 400% of motor full load Amps
2
2
1.5
1.5
1
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
2
2
2.4
3.7
4.2
5.1
7.2
7.9
13.5
5
5
5.4
9.6
6.4
12.5
12.5
24
24
5
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics
Type LCkD and LPkD contactors
Type
LC1-D09
LC1-D12
LC1-D18
LC1-D25
Control circuit characteristics
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
50 or 60 Hz
V
21 to 660
Operational
0.8 to 1.1 Uc
Drop-out
0.3 to 0.6 Uc
50 or 60 Hz coils
Control voltage limits (θ ≤ 55 °C)
Operational
0.85 to 1.1 Uc at 60 Hz
Drop-out
0.3 to 0.6 Uc
50/60 Hz coils
50 Hz coil
Inrush
VA
Cos ϕ
60
60
60
90
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
50/60 Hz coil
VA
70
70
70
10
50 Hz coil
VA
7
7
7
7.5
0.3
50 Hz AC
Sealed
Cos ϕ
0.3
0.3
0.3
50/60 Hz coil
VA
8
8
8
8.5
60 Hz coil
VA
70
70
70
100
0.75
Average consumption at 20 °C and at Uc
Inrush
Cos ϕ
0.75
0.75
0.75
50/60 Hz coil
VA
70
70
70
100
60 Hz coil
VA
7.5
7.5
7.5
8.5
60 Hz AC
Sealed
Cos ϕ
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
VA
8
8
8
8.5
50/60 Hz
W
2 to 3
2 to 3
2 to 3
2.5 to 3.5
Closing “C”
ms
12 to 22
12 to 22
12 to 22
15 to 24
Opening “O”
ms
50/60 Hz coil
Heat dissipation
Operating time c
Mechanical durability in millions of
operating cycles
Maximum operating rate at ambient
temperature ≤ 55 °C
4 to 19
4 to 19
4 to 19
5 to 19
50 or 60 Hz coil
20
20
16
16
50/60 Hz coil at 50 Hz
15
15
15
12
In operating cycles per hour
3600
3600
3600
3600
c The closing time “C” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time “O” is measured from the moment the coil supply is
switched off to the moment the mains poles separate.
6
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics
LC1-D32
LC1-D38
LC1-D40
21 to 660
24 to 660
0.8 to 1.1 Uc
0.85 to 1.1 Uc
LC1-D50
LC1-D65
LC1-D80
LC1-D95
LC1-D115
LC1-D150
24 to 50
–
0.3 to 0.6 Uc
0.3 to 0.5 Uc
0.85 to 1.1 Uc at 60 Hz
–
0.8 to 1.15 Uc at 50/60 Hz
0.3 to 0.6 Uc
0.3 to 0.5 Uc
90
90
200
200
200
200
200
300
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.8
–
0.9
100
100
245
245
245
245
245
450
450
7.5
7.5
20
20
20
20
20
22
–
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.9
8.5
8.5
26
26
26
26
26
6
6
100
100
220
220
220
220
220
300
–
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.8
0.9
100
100
245
245
245
245
245
450
450
8.5
8.5
22
22
22
22
22
22
–
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.9
8.5
8.5
26
26
26
26
26
6
6
2.5 to 3.5
2.5 to 3.5
6 to 10
6 to 10
6 to 10
6 to 10
6 to 10
7 to 8
6 to 7
15 to 24
15 to 24
20 to 26
20 to 26
20 to 26
20 to 35
20 to 35
20 to 50
25 to 35
5 to 19
5 to 19
8 to 12
8 to 12
8 to 12
6 to 20
6 to 20
6 to 20
20 to 55
16
16
16
16
16
10
10
8
–
12
12
6
6
6
4
4
8
8
3600
3600
3600
3600
3600
3600
3600
2400
1200
7
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics
Type
LP1-D09, D12, D18
LP1-D25, D32
LP1-D40, D50, D65
LP1-D80
LC1-D115
LC1-D150
Control circuit characteristics
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits
(θ ≤ 55 °C)
DC
Operational
V
Standard coil
Wide range coil
Drop-out
Average consumption at 20 °C and at Uc
Operating time c average at Uc
DC
12 to 440
12 to 440
24 to 440
0.8 to 1.1 Uc
0.85 to 1.1 Uc
0.7 to 1.2 Uc
0.7 to 1.25 Uc
0.75 to 1.2 Uc
–
0.1 to 0.25 Uc
0.1 to 0.3 Uc
0.2 to 0.4 Uc
Inrush
W
9
11
22
22
6
Sealed
W
9
11
22
22
6
Closing “C”
ms
40 to 48
52 to 64
85 to 110
95 to 130
25 to 35
Opening “O”
ms
6 to 14
8 to 14
20 to 35
20 to 35
20 to 35
Note: the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For normal three-phase applications, arcing time is normally less than 10 ms.
The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
Mechanical durability at Uc
In millions of operating cycles
30
25
20
20
8
Maximum operating rate at ambient
temperature ≤ 55 °C
In operating cycles per hour
3600
3600
3600
3600
1200
c The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time “C” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact
of the main poles. The opening time “O” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the mains poles separate.
8
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics
Type LCkD and LPkD contactors
Integrated auxiliary contacts
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated thermal current (Ith)
Up to
V
690
Conforming to IEC 947-1
V
1000
Conforming to UL, CSA
V
600
For ambient temperature≤ 40 °C (104° F)
A
10
Hz
25 to 400
U min (minimum voltage)
V
17
I min (minimum current)
mA
5
Frequency of operational current
Minimum switching capacity
Short-circuit protection
Conforming to IEC 947-5-1
Rated making capacity
Conforming to IEC 947-5-1, I rms
A
140 AC, 250 DC
gG fuse: 10 A
1s
A
100
Short time rating
Permissible
for
500 ms
A
120
100 ms
A
140
MΩ
> 10
1.5 on energization and on de-energization
Insulation resistance
Non-overlap time
Guaranteed between N.C. and N.O. contacts
ms
Operational power of contacts
conforming to IEC 947-5-1
AC supply categories AC-14 and AC-15
Electrical durability (up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet: making power (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times
the power broken (cos ϕ 0.4).
DC supply category DC-13
Electrical life (up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as
the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.
V
24
48
110/ 127
220/230
380/400
440
600
V
24
48
110
220
440
600
1 million operating cycles
VA
150
300
400
480
500
500
500
W
120
90
75
68
61
58
3 million operating cycles
VA
80
170
250
290
320
320
320
W
70
50
38
33
28
27
10 million operating cycles
VA
30
65
90
120
130
130
130
W
25
18
14
12
10
9
Occasional making capacity
VA
1200
2600
7000
13 000
15 000
13 000
9000
W
1000
700
400
260
220
170
1 Breaking limit of contacts for:
maximum of 50 operating cycles at
10 s intervals. (power broken =
making power x cos ❊ 0.7).
Power broken in VA
220
440 600 V
2 Electrical durability of contacts:
- for 1 million operating cycles (2a).
- for 3 million operating cycles (2b).
- for 10 million operating cycles
(2c).
3 Breaking limit of contacts for:
maximum of 20 operating cycles at
10 s intervals and with current
passing for 0.5 s per cycle.
4 Thermal limit.
Power broken in VA
16 000
1000
10 000
8000
6000
5000
4000
3000
4
700
500
1
3
300
2000
1000
800
600
500
400
300
4
200
2a
250
200
200
100
80
60
50
40
30
140
100
2b
20
2c
50
100
80
60
2a
2b
2c
10
8
6
20
12
40
24
48
110
120
220
24
48
110
380 500
440 690 V
9
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics
Type LCkD and LPkD contactors
Power and control circuit connections
LC1-D09
LP1-D09
Type
LC1-D12
LP1-D12
LC1-D18
LP1-D18
LC1-D25
LP1-D25
18-8
Power circuit connections
Connector type
Stranded cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end
Cabling
Solid cable without cable end
Screw clamp terminals
1 conductor
AWG
18-10
18-10
18-8
2 conductors
AWG
18-10
18-10
18-8
18-8
1 conductor
mm2
1/4
1/4
1.5/6
1.5/10
2 conductors
mm2
1/4
1/4
1.5/6
1.5/6
1 conductor
AWG
18-6
18-6
18-3
18-3
2 conductors
AWG
18-10
18-10
18-6
18-3
1 conductor
mm2
1/4
1/4
1/6
1/6
2 conductors
mm2
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/4
1/4
1 conductor
AWG
18-8
18-8
18-8
18-8
2 conductors
AWG
18-8
18-8
18-8
18-8
1 conductor
mm2
1/4
1/4
1.5/6
1.5/6
2 conductors
mm2
1/4
1/4
1.5/6
1.5/6
Phillips head type
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
Screwdriver Ø
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Hexagon spanner
–
–
–
–
Tightening torque
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
15 lb.-in.
1.7 Nkm
15 lb.-in.
1.85 Nkm
Connection by bus bar or ring tongue terminals
Bar c.s.a.
Bus bar connection
–
–
–
–
Lug external Ø
mm
8
8
8
10
Screw Ø
mm
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M4
Phillips head type
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
Screwdriver Ø
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Hexagon spanner
–
–
–
–
Tightening torque
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
15 lb.-in.
1.7 Nkm
15 lb.-in.
1.85 Nkm
Control circuit connections
Connection by cable
Screw clamp terminals
Stranded cable without cable end
Cabling
Stranded cable with cable end
Solid cable without cable end
1 or 2 conductors
AWG
18-14
18-14
18-14
18-14
1 conductor
mm2
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
2 conductors
mm2
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1 conductor
mm2
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
2 conductors
mm2
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1 conductor
mm2
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
2 conductors
mm2
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
Phillips head type
Screwdriver Ø
mm
Tightening torque
Connection by bus bar or ring tongue terminals
Lug external Ø
mm
8
8
8
Screw Ø
mm
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
8
M3.5
Phillips head type
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
Screwdriver Ø
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
Tightening torque
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
10
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics
LC1-D32
LP1-D32
LC1-D38
LC1-D40
LP1-D40
14-6
–
10-3
14-6
–
2.5/10
LC1-D50
LP1-D50
LC1-D65
LP1-D65
LC1-D80
LP1-D80
LC1-D95
10-3
10-3
10-2
–
8-250 mcm
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
–
8-0+8-250 mcm
8-0+8-250 mcm
2.5/10
2.5/25
2.5/25
2.5/25
4/50
4/50
10/120
10/120
2.5/10
2.5/10
2.5/16
2.5/16
2.5/16
4/25
4/25
10/120+ 10/50
10/120+ 10/50
18-3/0
–
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
–
–
–
14-2
–
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
–
–
–
1/10
1/10
2.5/25
2.5/25
2.5/25
4/50
4/50
10/120
10/120
1.5/6
1.5/6
2.5/10
2.5/10
2.5/10
4/16
4/16
10/120+ 10/50
10/120+ 10/50
14-8
–
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-3
–
8-250 mcm
8-250 mcm
10-8
–
–
–
–
–
–
8-0+ 8-250mcm
8-0+8-250 mcm
1.5/10
1.5/10
2.5/25
2.5/25
2.5/25
4/50
4/50
10/120
10/120
2.5/10
2.5/10
2.5/16
2.5/16
2.5/16
4/25
4/25
10/120+ 10/50
10/120+ 10/50
N° 2
N° 2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø6
Ø6
Ø 6 to Ø 8
Ø 6 to Ø 8
Ø 6 to Ø 8
Ø 6 to Ø 8
Ø 6 to Ø 8
–
–
–
–
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
20 lb.-in.
2.5 Nkm
–
2.5 Nkm
45 lb.-in.
5 Nkm
45 lb.-in.
5 Nkm
45 lb.-in.
5 Nkm
100 lb.-in.
9 Nkm
–
9 Nkm
100 lb. in.
12 Nkm
100 lb. in.
12 Nkm
Box lug terminals
LC1-D115
LC1-D150
LA9D11560• terminals
8-250 mcm
Connection by bus bar or ring tongue terminals
–
–
–
–
–
3 x 16
3 x 16
5 x 25
5 x 25
10
10
13
16
16
17
17
25
25
M4
M4
M5
M6
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
N° 2
N° 2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3/16 in.
Ø 6 mm
3/16 in.
Ø 6 mm
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 mm
10 mm
13 mm
13 mm
2.5
2.5
6
8
8
8
8
14
14
Connection by cable
Screw clamp terminals
18-14
18-14
18-14
18-14
18-14
18-14
18-14
18-14
18-14
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/2.5
1/2.5
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/2.5
1/2.5
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
7 lb.-in.
1.2 Nkm
8
Connection by bus bar or ring tongue terminals
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
N° 2
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
3/16 in.
Ø6
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
7 lb.-in.
1.2
11
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: AC
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole contactors with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
500V
660V
690V
1000V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
2.2
4
4
4
5.5
5.5
–
Rated operating
current in AC-3
440V up to
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts *
A
N/O
N/C
–
9
LC1-D0901kk
3
4
5.5
LC1-D2510kk
7.5
9
LC1-D9511kk
5.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
9
11
9
11
15
18
–
18.5
18.5
12
–
15
18.5
18.5
–
10
15
15
18.5
7.5
10
11
15
18.5
7.5
25
–
18.5
32
–
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
c DIN rail or screw
mounting
Weight
–
LC1-D0900kk
0.340 (0.75)
1
–
LC1-D0910kk q
0.340 (0.75)
–
1
LC1-D0901kk q
0.340 (0.75)
–
–
LC1-D1200kk
0.345 (0.77)
1
–
LC1-D1210kk q
0.345 (0.77)
–
1
LC1-D1201kk q
0.345 (0.77)
–
–
LC1-D1800kk
0.355 (0.79)
1
–
LC1-D1810kk q
0.365 (0.81)
–
1
LC1-D1801kk q
0.365 (0.81)
–
–
LC1-D2500kk
0.400 (0.89)
1
–
LC1-D2510kk q
0.530 (1.18)
–
1
LC1-D2501kk q
0.530 (1.18)
–
–
LC1-D3200kk
0.545 (1.21)
1
–
LC1-D3210kk q
0.555 (1.21)
–
1
LC1-D3201kk q
0.555(1.23)
1
–
LC1-D3810kk
0.555 (1.23)
–
1
LC1-D3801kk
0.555 (1.23)
kg (lb.)
38
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
22
40
1
1
LC1-D4011kk q
1.400 (3.11)
15
22
25
30
30
33
30
50
1
1
LC1-D5011kk
1.400 (3.11)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
37
65
1
1
LC1-D6511kk
1.400 (3.11)
22
37
45
45
55
45
45
80
1
1
LC1-D8011kk
1.590 (3.53)
25
45
45
45
55
45
45
95
1
1
LC1-D9511kk
1.610 (3.58)
30
55
59
59
75
80
75
115
–
–
LC1-D11500kk
2.420 (5.38)
40
75
80
80
90
100
90
150
–
–
LC1-D15000kk
2.440 (5.42)
Note: 3-pole contactors without auxiliary contacts conform to standard EN 50012.
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LC1-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aAC Coil Selection
Volts
24
42
48
110
120
208
220
230
240
277
380
400
415
440
480
500
575
600
660
LC1-D09 to D95
50 Hz
B5
D5
E5
F5
–
–
M5
P5
U5
–
Q5
V5
N5
R5
–
S5
–
X5
Y5
60 Hz
B6
D6
E6
F6
G6
L6
M6
–
U6
W6
Q6
–
–
R6
T6
–
S6
X6
–
Q7
V7
N7
R7
T7
S7
–
–
–
LC1-D09 to D150 (coils D115 and D150 with built-in surge suppression)
50/60
Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
P7
U7
Other voltages from 24 to 660 V, see pages 53 to 56.
LC1-D11500kk
12
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: AC
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
3-pole contactors with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Maximum horsepower ratings
1-phase 50/60 Hz
3-phase 50/60 Hz
115/
120V
230/
240V
200/
208V
220/
240V
460/
480V
575V
600V
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5
1
2
2
5
7.5
Maximum
inductive
current in AC-3
category 600V
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/C
–
9
LC1-D0901kk
1
1
2
LC1-D2510kk
2
2
3
3
3
5
3
5
7.5
5
7.5
10
10
7.5
12
15
15
10
10
18
20
20
25
30
32
Not UL listed or CSA certified
Not for North American applications
Weight
–
LC1-D0900kk
0.340 (0.75)
1
–
LC1-D0910kk q
0.340 (0.75)
–
1
LC1-D0901kk q
0.340 (0.75)
–
–
LC1-D1200kk
0.345 (0.77)
1
–
LC1-D1210kk q
0.345 (0.77)
–
1
LC1-D1201kk q
0.345 (0.77)
–
–
LC1-D1800kk
0.355 (0.79)
1
–
LC1-D1810kk q
0.365 (0.81)
–
1
LC1-D1801kk q
0.365 (0.81)
–
–
LC1-D2500kk
0.400 (0.89)
1
–
LC1-D2510kk q
0.530 (1.18)
–
1
LC1-D2501kk q
0.530 (1.18)
–
–
LC1-D3200kk
0.545 (1.21)
1
–
LC1-D3210kk q
0.555 (1.21)
–
1
LC1-D3201kk q
0.555(1.23)
1
–
LC1-D3810kk
0.555 (1.23)
–
1
LC1-D3801kk
0.555 (1.23)
kg (lb.)
38
3
5
10
10
30
30
40
1
1
LC1-D4011kk q
1.400 (3.11)
3
7.5
15
15
40
40
50
1
1
LC1-D5011kk
1.400 (3.11)
5
10
20
20
50
50
65
1
1
LC1-D6511kk
1.400 (3.11)
7.5
15
25
30
60
60
80
1
1
LC1-D8011kk
1.590 (3.53)
95
1
1
LC1-D9511kk
1.610 (3.58)
Not UL listed or CSA certified
Not for North American applications
LC1-D9511kk
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
c DIN rail or screw
mounting
–
–
30
40
75
100
115
–
–
LC1-D11500kk
2.420 (5.38)
–
–
40
50
100
125
150
–
–
LC1-D15000kk
2.440 (5.42)
Note: 3-pole contactors without auxiliary contacts conform to standard EN 50012.
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LC1-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aAC Coil Selection
Volts
24
42
48
110
120
208
220
230
240
277
380
400
415
440
480
500
575
600
660
LC1-D09 to D95
50 Hz
B5
D5
E5
F5
–
–
M5
P5
U5
–
Q5
V5
N5
R5
–
S5
–
X5
Y5
60 Hz
B6
D6
E6
F6
G6
L6
M6
–
U6
W6
Q6
–
–
R6
T6
–
S6
X6
–
Q7
V7
N7
R7
T7
S7
–
–
–
LC1-D09 to D150 (coils D115 and D150 with built-in surge suppression)
50/60
Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
P7
U7
Other voltages from 24 to 660 V, see pages 53 to 56.
LC1-D11500kk
13
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: AC
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole contactors for ring-tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
500V
660V
690V
1000V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
2.2
LC1-D115006kk
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
4
5.5
9
11
15
18.5
4
5.5
5.5
9
7.5
10
11
15
15
18.5
18.5
18.5
5.5
7.5
10
15
18.5
18.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
Rated operating
current in AC-3
440V up to
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/C
–
9
12
18
25
32
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
c DIN rail or screw
mounting
Weight
–
LC1-D09006kk
0.335 (0.74)
1
–
LC1-D09106kk
0.335 (0.74)
–
1
LC1-D09016kk
0.335 (0.74)
–
–
LC1-D12006kk
0.335 (0.74)
1
–
LC1-D12106kk
0.335 (0.74)
–
1
LC1-D12016kk
0.335 (0.74)
–
–
LC1-D18006kk
0.345 (0.77)
1
–
LC1-D18106kk
0.352 (0.78)
–
1
LC1-D18016kk
0.352 (0.78)
–
–
LC1-D25006kk
0.390 (0.87)
1
–
LC1-D25106kk
0.520 (1.15)
–
1
LC1-D25016kk
0.520 (1.15)
–
–
LC1-D32006kk
0.535 (1.18)
kg (lb.)
1
–
LC1-D32106kk
0.545 (1.21)
–
1
LC1-D32016kk
0.545 (1.21)
1
–
LC1-D38106kk
0.545 (1.21)
–
1
LC1-D38016kk
0.545 (1.21)
38
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
22
40
1
1
LC1-D40116kk
1.320 (2.93)
15
22
25
30
30
33
30
50
1
1
LC1-D50116kk
1.320 (2.93)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
37
65
1
1
LC1-D65116kk
1.320 (2.93)
22
37
45
45
55
45
45
80
1
1
LC1-D80116kk
1.600 (3.55)
25
45
45
45
55
45
45
95
1
1
LC1-D95116kk
1.600 (3.55)
30
55
59
59
75
80
75
115
–
–
LC1-D115006kk
2.110 (4.69)
40
75
80
80
90
100
90
150
–
–
LC1-D150006kk
2.130 (4.69)
3-pole contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL Recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Note: 3-pole contactors without auxiliary contacts conform to standard EN 50012.
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LC1-D09 to D38: clIp-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a Standard control circuit voltages see page 12.
14
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: AC
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
3-pole contactors for ring-tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
Maximum horsepower ratings
1-phase 50/60 Hz
3-phase 50/60 Hz
115/
120V
230/
240V
200/
208V
220/
240V
460/
480V
575V
600V
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5
LC1-D115006kk
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
3
5
2
3
5
7.5
10
2
3
5
7.5
10
5
7.5
10
15
20
7.5
10
15
20
30
Not UL listed or CSA certified
Not for North American applications
Maximum
inductive current
in AC-3 category
600V
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/C
–
9
12
18
25
32
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
c DIN rail or screw
mounting
Weight
–
LC1-D09006kk
0.335 (0.74)
1
–
LC1-D09106kk
0.335 (0.74)
–
1
LC1-D09016kk
0.335 (0.74)
–
–
LC1-D12006kk
0.335 (0.74)
1
–
LC1-D12106kk
0.335 (0.74)
–
1
LC1-D12016kk
0.335 (0.74)
–
–
LC1-D18006kk
0.345 (0.77)
1
–
LC1-D18106kk
0.352 (0.78)
–
1
LC1-D18016kk
0.352 (0.78)
–
–
LC1-D25006kk
0.390 (0.87)
1
–
LC1-D25106kk
0.520 (1.15)
–
1
LC1-D25016kk
0.520 (1.15)
–
–
LC1-D32006kk
0.535 (1.18)
1
–
LC1-D32106kk
0.545 (1.21)
–
1
LC1-D32016kk
0.545 (1.21)
1
–
LC1-D38106kk
0.545 (1.21)
–
1
LC1-D38016kk
0.545 (1.21)
kg (lb.)
38
3
5
10
10
30
30
40
1
1
LC1-D40116kk
1.320 (2.93)
3
7.5
15
15
40
40
50
1
1
LC1-D50116kk
1.320 (2.93)
5
10
20
20
50
50
65
1
1
LC1-D65116kk
1.320 (2.93)
7.5
15
25
30
60
60
80
1
1
LC1-D80116kk
1.600 (3.55)
95
1
1
LC1-D95116kk
1.600 (3.55)
Not UL listed or CSA certified
Not for North American applications
–
–
30
40
75
100
115
–
–
LC1-D115006kk
2.110 (4.69)
–
–
40
50
100
125
150
–
–
LC1-D150006kk
2.130 (4.69)
3-pole contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL Recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Note: 3-pole contactors without auxiliary contacts conform to standard EN 50012.
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LC1-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a Standard control circuit voltages see page 13.
15
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: DC
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole contactors with Finger-safe™ terminals for power cabling
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
500V
660V
690V
1000V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
2.2
4
4
4
5.5
5.5
–
Rated operat.
current in AC-3
440V up to
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/C
1
–
4
5.5
LC1-D2510kk
5.5
7.5
11
5.5
5.5
9
7.5
9
11
10
11
15
7.5
10
15
Weight
LP1-D0910kk
0.640 (1.42)
kg (lb.)
9
LC1-D0910kk
3
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
c DIN rail or screw
mounting
–
–
1
LP1-D0901kk
0.640 (1.42)
1
–
LP1-D1210kk
0.640 (1.42)
12
–
–
1
LP1-D1201kk
0.640 (1.42)
1
–
LP1-D1810kk
0.650 (1.44)
18
–
–
1
LP1-D1801kk
0.650 (1.44)
1
–
LP1-D2510kk
0.925 (2.05)
25
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
–
32
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
22
40
–
1
LP1-D2501kk
0.925 (2.05)
1
–
LP1-D3210kk
0.950 (2.11)
–
1
LP1-D3201kk
0.950 (2.11)
1
1
LP1-D4011kk
2.185 (4.85)
15
22
25
30
30
33
30
50
1
1
LP1-D5011kk
2.185 (4.85)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
37
65
1
1
LP1-D6511kk
2.190 (4.87)
22
37
45
45
55
45
45
80
1
1
LP1-D8011kk
2.525 (5.61)
30
55
59
59
75
80
75
115
–
–
LC1-D11500kk
2.440 (5.42)
40
75
80
80
90
100
90
150
–
–
LC1-D15000kk
2.440 (5.42)
Note: Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LP1-D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LP1-D40 to D80: clip-on mounting on 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aDC Coil Selection
Volts
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
LP1-D09 to D32
LC1-D6511kk
U 0.8 to
1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to
1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
U 0.7 to
1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
LP1-D40 to D80
U 0.85 to
1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.75 to
1.2 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
LC1-D115 and D150 (coils with built-in surge suppression)
U 0.7 to
1.2 Uc
–
BD
–
ED
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
LC1-D11500kk
16
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: DC
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
3-pole contactors with Finger-safe™ terminals for power cabling
Maximum horsepower ratings
1-phase 50/60 Hz
3-phase 50/60 Hz
115/
120V
230/
240V
200/
208V
220/
240V
460/
480V
575V
600V
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5
1
2
2
5
7.5
Maximum
inductive
current in AC-3
category 600V
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/C
1
–
LP1-D0910kk
0.640 (1.42)
–
1
LP1-D0901kk
0.640 (1.42)
1
–
LP1-D1210kk
1
2
2
LC1-D2510kk
2
3
3
5
3
3
5
7.5
0.640 (1.42)
–
1
LP1-D1201kk
0.640 (1.42)
1
–
LP1-D1810kk
5
7.5
10
10
10
0.650 (1.44)
–
1
LP1-D1801kk
0.650 (1.44)
1
–
LP1-D2510kk
7.5
0.925 (2.05)
–
1
LP1-D2501kk
0.925 (2.05)
1
–
LP1-D3210kk
10
0.950 (2.11)
–
1
LP1-D3201kk
0.950 (2.11)
18
20
20
kg (lb.)
12
15
15
Weight
9
LC1-D0910kk
1
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
c DIN rail or screw
mounting
25
30
32
3
5
10
10
30
30
40
1
1
LP1-D4011kk
2.185 (4.85)
3
7.5
15
15
40
40
50
1
1
LP1-D5011kk
2.185 (4.85)
5
10
20
20
50
50
65
1
1
LP1-D6511kk
2.190 (4.87)
7.5
15
25
30
60
60
80
1
1
LP1-D8011kk
2.525 (5.61)
–
–
30
40
75
100
115
–
–
LC1-D11500kk
2.440 (5.42)
–
–
40
50
100
125
150
–
–
LC1-D15000kk
2.440 (5.42)
Note: Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LP1-D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LP1-D40 to D80: clip-on mounting on 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aDC Coil Selection
Volts
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
LP1-D09 to D32
LC1-D6511kk
U 0.8 to
1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to
1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
U 0.7 to
1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
LP1-D40 to D80
U 0.85 to
1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.75 to
1.2 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
LC1-D115 and D150 (coils with built-in surge suppression)
U 0.7 to
1.2 Uc
–
BD
–
ED
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
LC1-D11500kk
17
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: DC
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole contactors for ring-torque terminals or bus bar power connections
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
500V
660V
690V
1000V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
2.2
3
4
LC1-D115006kk
5.5
4
5.5
7.5
11
4
5.5
9
11
4
5.5
5.5
9
11
7.5
10
15
5.5
7.5
10
15
–
–
–
–
Rated operat.
current in AC-3
440V up to
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/C
1
–
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
c DIN rail or screw
mounting
Weight
kg (lb.)
LP1-D09106kk
0.630 (1.40)
9
–
1
LP1-D09016kk
0.630 (1.40)
1
–
LP1-D12106kk
0.630 (1.40)
–
1
LP1-D12016kk
0.630 (1.40)
1
–
LP1-D18106kk
0.640 (1.42)
–
1
LP1-D18016kk
0.640 (1.42)
1
–
LP1-D25106kk
0.915 (2.03)
–
1
LP1-D25016kk
0.915 (2.03)
1
–
LP1-D32106kk
0.940 (2.09)
12
18
25
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
–
32
–
1
LP1-D32016kk
0.940 (2.09)
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
22
40
1
1
LP1-D40116kk
2.175 (4.83)
15
22
25
30
30
33
30
50
1
1
LP1-D50116kk
2.175 (4.83)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
37
65
1
1
LP1-D65116kk
2.180 (4.84)
22
37
45
45
55
45
45
80
1
1
LP1-D80116kk
2.515 (5.59)
30
55
59
59
75
80
75
115
–
–
LC1-D115006kk
2.130 (4.73)
40
75
80
80
90
100
90
150
–
–
LC1-D150006kk
2.130 (4.73)
3-pole contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL Recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Note: Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LC1-D09 to D32: clIp-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D80: clip-on mounting on 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a Standard control circuit voltages see page 16.
18
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: DC
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
3-pole contactors for ring-torque terminals or bus bar power connections
Maximum horsepower ratings
1-phase 50/60 Hz
3-phase 50/60 Hz
115/
120V
230/
240V
200/
208V
220/
240V
460/
480V
575V
600V
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5
1
1
LC1-D115006kk
2
1
2
3
3
2
3
5
7.5
2
3
5
7.5
5
7.5
10
15
7.5
10
15
20
Maximum
inductive
current in AC-3
category 600V
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/C
1
–
LP1-D09106kk
–
1
LP1-D09016kk
0.630 (1.40)
1
–
LP1-D12106kk
0.630 (1.40)
–
1
LP1-D12016kk
0.630 (1.40)
1
–
LP1-D18106kk
0.640 (1.42)
–
1
LP1-D18016kk
0.640 (1.42)
1
–
LP1-D25106kk
0.915 (2.03)
–
1
LP1-D25016kk
0.915 (2.03)
1
–
LP1-D32106kk
0.940 (2.09)
Weight
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
c DIN rail or screw mounting
kg (lb.)
0.630 (1.40)
9
12
18
25
2
5
10
10
20
30
32
–
1
LP1-D32016kk
0.940 (2.09)
3
5
10
10
30
30
40
1
1
LP1-D40116kk
2.175 (4.83)
3
7.5
15
15
40
40
50
1
1
LP1-D50116kk
2.175 (4.83)
5
10
20
20
50
50
65
1
1
LP1-D65116kk
2.180 (4.84)
7.5
15
25
30
60
60
80
1
1
LP1-D80116kk
2.515 (5.59)
–
–
30
40
75
100
115
–
–
LC1-D115006kk
2.130 (4.73)
–
–
40
50
100
125
150
–
–
LC1-D150006kk
2.130 (4.73)
3-pole contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL Recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Note: Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LC1-D09 to D32: clIp-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D80: clip-on mounting on 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a Standard control circuit voltages see page 17.
19
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Resistive Loads
Control circuit: AC
3 or 4-pole contactors with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Non-inductive loads maximum current
(θ ≤ 55 °C) Utilization category AC-1
Number of poles
A
N/O
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
N/C
N/O
–
3
–
N/C
kg (lb.)
–
1
or
–
or
25
LC1-D112004kk
32
LC1-D11500kk
0.340 (0.75)
LC1-D1210kk q
0.345 (0.77)
LC1-D0901kk
0.340 (0.75)
LC1-D1201kk q
0.345 (0.77)
LC1-D12004kk
0.350 (0.77)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D12008kk
0.350 (0.77)
–
–
LC1-D1800kk
0.355 (0.79)
1
–
LC1-D1810kk
0.365 (0.81)
–
1
LC1-D1801kk
0.365 (0.81)
–
–
LC1-D2500kk
0.400 (0.89)
1
–
LC1-D2510kk
0.530 (1.18)
–
1
LC1-D2501kk
0.530 (1.18)
–
–
4
–
–
–
LC1-D25004kk
0.530 (1.18)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D25008kk
0.535 (1.19)
–
–
LC1-D3200kk
0.545 (1.21)
LC1-D3210kk
0.555 (1.23)
3
200
0.345 (0.77)
LC1-D0910kk
–
LC1-D65004kk
125
or
LC1-D1200kk q
–
40
80
1
0.340 (0.75)
–
3
60
–
LC1-D0900kk
4
3
50
Weight
Catalog number.
Complete with code indicating
control circuit voltage a.
c DIN rail or screw mounting
–
1
–
–
1
or
LC1-D3810kk
LC1-D3201kk
or
0.555 (1.23)
LC1-D3801kk
3
–
1
1
LC1-D4011kk
1.400 (3.11)
4
–
–
–
LC1-D40004kk
1.440 (3.20)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D40008kk
1.450 (3.22)
LC1-D5011kk
1.400 (3.11)
LC1-D6511kk q
1.400 (3.11)
3
–
1
1
4
–
–
–
LC1-D65004kk
1.440 (3.20)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D65008kk
1.450 (3.22)
3
–
1
1
LC1-D8011kk
1.590 (3.53)
LC1-D9511kk q
1.610 (3.58)
4
–
–
–
LC1-D80004kk
1.760 (3.91)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D80008kk
1.840 (4.09)
LC1-D11500kk
2.420 (5.38)
LC1-D15000kk q
2.440 (5.42)
LC1-D115004kk
2.860 (6.35)
3
–
–
–
4
–
–
–
or
or
or
Note: 3-pole contactors without auxiliary contacts conform to standard EN 50012.
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages ???? to ?????.
c For LC1-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aAC Coil Selection
Volts
24
42
48
110
120
127
208
220
230
240
277
380
400
415
440
480
500
575
600
660
LC1-D09 to D95
50 Hz
B5
D5
E5
F5
–
G5
–
M5
P5
U5
–
Q5
V5
N5
R5
–
S5
–
X5
Y5
60 Hz
B6
D6
E6
F6
G6
–
L6
M6
–
U6
W6
Q6
–
–
R6
T6
–
S6
X6
–
U7
–
Q7
V7
N7
R7
T7
–
–
–
–
LC1-D09 to D150 (coils D115 and D150 with built-in surge suppression)
50/60
Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
–
–
M7
P7
Other voltages from 24 to 660 V, see pages 53 to 56.
q Selection according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in IEC Contactors Selection Guide 8502CT9801.
20
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Resistive Loads
Control Circuit: AC
3 or 4-pole contactors for ring tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
Non-inductive loads
maximum current
(θ ≤ 55 °C) Utilization
category AC-1
Number of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/O
N/C
–
3
–
1
32
80
125
200
0.335 (0.74)
–
–
–
1
kg (lb.)
or
or
0.335 (0.74)
0.335 (0.74)
LC1-D12106kk q
0.335 (0.74)
LC1-D09016kk
0.335 (0.74)
LC1-D12016kk q
0.335 (0.74)
–
–
LC1-D120046kk
0.340 (0.75)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D120086kk
0.340 (0.75)
–
–
LC1-D18006kk
0.345 (0.77)
1
–
LC1-D18106kk
0.352 (0.78)
–
1
LC1-D18016kk
0.352 (0.78)
–
–
LC1-D25006kk
0.390 (0.87)
1
–
LC1-D25106kk
0.520 (1.15)
–
1
LC1-D25016kk
0.520 (1.15)
3
–
–
or
LC1-D12006kk q
LC1-D09106kk
–
40
60
LC1-D09006kk
4
3
50
Weight
N/C
25
LC1-D115006kk
Catalog number. Complete with code
indicating control circuit voltage a.
c DIN rail or screw mounting
4
–
–
–
LC1-D250046kk
0.520 (1.15)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D250086kk
0.525 (1.17)
–
–
LC1-D32006kk
0.535 (1.19)
LC1-D32106kk
0.545 (1.21)
3
–
1
–
–
1
or
or
LC1-D38106kk
0.545 (1.21)
LC1-D32016kk
0.545 (1.21)
LC1-D38016kk
0.545 (1.21)
3
–
1
1
LC1-D40116kk
1.320 (2.93)
4
–
–
–
LC1-D400046kk
1.430 (3.18)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D400086kk
1.440 (3.20)
LC1-D50116kk
1.320 (2.93)
3
–
1
1
LC1-D65116kk q
1.320 (2.93)
4
–
–
–
LC1-D650046kk
1.430 (3.18)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D650086kk
1.440 (3.20)
LC1-D80116kk
1.600 (3.55)
or
3
–
1
1
LC1-D95116kk q
1.600 (3.55)
4
–
–
–
LC1-D800046kk
1.750 (3.89)
2
2
–
–
LC1-D800086kk
1.830 (4.07)
LC1-D115006kk
2.110 (4.68)
LC1-D150006kk
2.130 (4.73)
LC1-D1150046kk q
2.450 (5.44)
3
–
–
–
4
–
–
–
or
or
3 or 4-pole contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL Recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Note: 3-pole contactors without auxiliary contacts conform to standard EN 50012.
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LC1-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
For LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a Standard control circuit voltages: see page 20.
q Selection according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in IEC Contactors Selection Guide 8502CT9801.
21
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Resistive Loads
Control Circuit: DC
3 or 4-pole contactors with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Non-inductive loads maximum
current (q ≤ 55 °C) Utilization
category AC-1
Number of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/O
N/C
1
–
0.640 (1.42)
LP1-D1210kk q
0.640 (1.42)
kg (lb.)
–
LP1-D0901kk
0.640 (1.42)
LP1-D1201kk q
0.640 (1.42)
LP1-D12004kk
0.640 (1.42)
LP1-D12008kk
0.640 (1.42)
1
or
32
LP1-D0910kk
–
25
LC1-D112004kk
Weight
N/C
or
3
Catalog number. Complete with code
indicating control circuit voltage a.
c DIN rail or screw mounting
4
–
–
–
2
2
–
–
1
–
LP1-D1810kk
0.650 (1.44)
–
1
LP1-D1801kk
0.650 (1.44)
1
–
LP1-D2510kk
0.925 (2.05)
–
1
LP1-D2501kk
0.925 (2.05)
3
3
or
–
–
40
50
4
–
–
–
LP1-D25004kk
0.930 (2.07)
2
2
–
–
LP1-D25008kk
0.930 (2.07)
1
–
LP1-D3210kk
0.950 (2.11)
–
1
LP1-D3201kk
0.950 (2.11)
3
60
LC1-D65004kk
–
3
–
1
1
LP1-D4011kk
2.185 (4.85)
4
–
–
–
LP1-D40004kk
2.205 (4.90)
2
2
–
–
LP1-D40008kk
2.200 (4.88)
3
–
1
LP1-D5011kk
2.185 (4.85)
LP1-D6511kk q
2.190 (4.86)
1
or
80
125
4
–
–
–
LP1-D65004kk
2.210 (4.91)
2
2
–
–
LP1-D65008kk
2.220 (4.93)
3
–
1
1
LP1-D8011kk
2.525 (5.61)
4
–
–
–
LP1-D80004kk
2.695 (5.99)
2
2
–
–
LP1-D80008kk
2.910 (6.47)
3
–
–
or
–
–
2.440 (5.42)
LC1-D15000kk q
2.440 (5.42)
LC1-D115004kk
2.900 (6.44)
–
200
4
LC1-D11500kk
–
Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages ???? to ?????.
c For LC1-D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D80: clip-on mounting on 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
For LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
LC1-D11500kk
a DC Coil Selection
Volts
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
U 0.8 to 1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to 1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
U 0.85 to 1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.75 to 1.2 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
LP1-D09 to D32
LP1-D40 to D80
LC1-D115 and D150 (coils with built-in surge suppression)
U 0.7 to 1.2 Uc
–
BD
–
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
q Selection according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in IEC Contactors Selection Guide 8502CT9801.
22
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Contactors for Resistive Loads
Control Circuit: DC
3 or 4-pole contactors for ring tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
Non-inductive loads maximum current
(θ ≤ 55 °C) Utilization category AC-1
Number of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
A
N/O
N/O
N/C
1
3
32
LC1-D115006kk
40
50
60
80
125
200
Weight
LP1-D09106kk
0.630 (1.40)
LP1-D12106kk q
0.630 (1.40)
LP1-D09016kk
0.630 (1.40)
LP1D12016kk q
0.630 (1.40)
N/C
–
–
25
Catalog number. Complete with code
indicating control circuit voltage a.
c DIN rail or screw mounting
–
1
kg (lb.)
or
or
4
–
–
–
LP1-D120046kk
0.630 (1.40)
2
2
–
–
LP1-D120086kk
0.630 (1.40)
1
–
LP1-D18106kk
0.640 (1.42)
–
1
LP1-D18016kk
0.640 (1.42)
1
–
LP1-D25106kk
0.915 (2.03)
–
1
LP1-D25016kk
0.915 (2.03)
–
–
LP1-D250046kk
0.920 (2.04)
3
–
3
–
4
–
2
2
–
–
LP1-D250086kk
0.920 (2.04)
1
–
LP1-D32106kk
0.940 (2.09)
–
1
LP1-D32016kk
0.940 (2.09)
3
–
3
–
1
1
LP1-D40116kk
2.175 (4.83)
4
–
–
–
LP1-D400046kk
2.190 (4.87)
2
2
–
–
LP1-D400086kk
2.190 (4.87)
LP1-D50116kk
2.175 (4.83)
LP1-D65116kk q
2.180 (4.84)
3
–
1
1
4
–
–
–
LP1-D650046kk
2.200 (4.89)
2
2
–
–
LP1-D650086kk
2.210 (4.91)
or
3
–
1
1
LP1-D80116kk
2.515 (5.59)
4
–
–
–
LP1-D800046kk
2.680 (5.95)
2
2
–
–
LP1-D800086kk
2.900 (6.44)
LC1-D115006kk
2.130 (4.73)
LC1-D150006kk q
2.130 (4.73)
LC1-D1150046kk
2.470 (5.49)
3
–
–
–
4
–
–
–
or
3 or 4-pole contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL Recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Note: Auxiliary contact blocks and modules: see pages 42 to 49.
c For LC1-D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
For LC1-D40 to D80: clip-on mounting on 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
For LC1-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a Standard control circuit voltages, see page ????.
q Selection according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve in IEC Contactors Selection Guide 8502CT9801.
23
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Reversing Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: AC
Kilowatt ratings for international applications, pre-assembled, horizontally mounted
3-pole reversing contactors with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Includes pre-wired power connections q f
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
LC1-D1201kk
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
1000 V
440 V
up to
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
LC1-D5011kk
Rated
Instantantaneous
operational auxiliary contacts
current in
per contactor
AC-3
4
4
5.5
4
5.5
7.5
5.5
9
11
7.5
10
11
15
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
5.5
10
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
–
Contactors supplied with coils
Catalog number. Complete
with code indicating control
circuit voltage a
DIN rail or screw mounting c
N/O
N/C
–
1
LC2-D0901kk q
1
–
LC2-D09011kk f
–
1
LC2-D1201kk q
1
–
LC2-D12011kk f
–
1
LC2-D1801kk q
1
–
LC2-D18011kk f
–
1
LC2-D2501kk q
1
–
LC2-D25011kk f
–
1
LC2-D3201kk q
1
–
LC2-D32011kk f
Weight
kg (lb.)
0.700 (1.55)
9
–
0.700 (1.55)
12
–
0.750 (1.67)
18
–
1.100 (2.44)
25
–
1.200 (2.67)
32
9
18.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
–
38
–
1
LC2-D3801kk q
1.200 (2.67)
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
–
40
1
1
LC2-D4011kk q
2.400 (5.33)
15
22
25
30
30
33
–
50
1
1
LC2-D5011kk q
2.400 (5.33)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
–
65
1
1
LC2-D6511kk q
2.400 (5.33)
22
37
45
45
55
45
–
80
1
1
LC2-D8011kk q
3.200 (7.11)
25
45
45
45
55
45
–
95
1
1
LC2-D9511kk q
3.200 (7.11)
30
55
59
59
75
80
75
115
–
–
LC2-D11500kk f
6.500 (14.44)
40
75
80
80
90
100
90
150
–
–
LC2-D15000kk f
6.600 (14.44)
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c LC2-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
LC2-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC2-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aAC Coil Selection
Volts
24
42
48
110
120
127
208
220
230
240
277
380
400
415
440
480
500
575
600
660
LC1-D09 to D95
50 Hz
B5
D5
E5
F5
–
G5
–
M5
P5
U5
–
Q5
V5
N5
R5
–
S5
–
–
Y5
60 Hz
B6
D6
E6
F6
G6
–
L6
M6
–
U6
W6
Q6
–
–
R6
T6
–
S6
–
–
U7
–
Q7
V7
N7
R7
T7
–
–
–
–
LC1-D09 to D150 (coils D115 and D150 with built-in surge suppression)
50/60
Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
–
–
M7
P7
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electronically interlocking contactor
operating coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
f Included with electrical contacts integrated in mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk02).
24
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Reversing Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: AC
Horsepower ratings for North American applications,
3-pole reversing contactors with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Pre-wired power connections q f
Maximum horsepower ratings
LC1-D1201kk
1-phase 50/60 Hz
3-phase 50/60 Hz
hp
hp
0.5
1
1
2
2
LC1-D5011kk
hp
1
2
2
5
10
7.5
7.5
5
7.5
hp
5
3
5
3
hp
2
3
3
hp
7.5
10
N/O
N/C
–
1
1
–
LC2-D09011kk f
–
1
LC2-D1201kk q
1
–
LC2-D12011kk f
kg (lb.)
LC2-D0901kk q
0.700 (1.55)
0.700 (1.55)
–
1
LC2-D1801kk q
1
–
LC2-D18011kk f
0.750 (1.67)
18
20
20
A
Contactors supplied with coils Weight
Catalog number. Complete with
code indicating control circuit
voltage a
DIN rail or screw mounting c
12
15
15
Instantantaneous
auxiliary contacts
per contactor
9
10
10
Maximum
inductive
current in
AC-3
category
600 V
–
1
LC2-D2501kk q
1
–
LC2-D25011kk f
1.100 (2.44)
25
30
–
1
LC2-D3201kk q
1
–
LC2-D32011kk f
1.200 (2.67)
38
–
1
LC2-D3801kk q
1.200 (2.67)
32
Not UL listed or CSA certified
Not for North American applications
3
5
10
10
30
30
40
1
1
LC2-D4011kk q
2.400 (5.33)
3
7.5
15
15
40
40
50
1
1
LC2-D5011kk q
2.400 (5.33)
5
10
20
20
50
50
65
1
1
LC2-D6511kk q
2.400 (5.33)
7.5
15
25
30
60
60
80
1
1
LC2-D8011kk q
3.200 (7.11)
95
1
1
LC2-D9511kk q
3.200 (7.11)
Not UL listed or CSA certified
Not for North American applications
–
–
30
40
75
100
115
–
–
LC2-D11500kk f
6.500 (14.44)
–
–
40
50
100
125
150
–
–
LC2-D15000kk f
6.600 (14.44)
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages ???? to ????.
c LC2-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
LC2-D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC2-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aAC Coil Selection
Volts
24
42
48
110
120
127
208
220
230
240
277
380
400
415
440
480
500
575
600
660
LC1-D09 to D95
50 Hz
B5
D5
E5
F5
–
G5
–
M5
P5
U5
–
Q5
V5
N5
R5
–
S5
–
–
Y5
60 Hz
B6
D6
E6
F6
G6
–
L6
M6
–
U6
W6
Q6
–
–
R6
T6
–
S6
–
–
U7
–
Q7
V7
N7
R7
T7
–
–
–
–
LC1-D09 to D150 (coils D115 and D150 with built-in surge suppression)
50/60
Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
–
–
M7
P7
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for switching contactor operating coils by
utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
f Included with electrical contacts integrated in mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk02) and pre-wired for switching contactor operating coils.
25
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Reversing Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: AC
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole reversing contactors for ring tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
Includes pre-wired power connections q f
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
Rated
Instantantaneous
operational auxiliary contacts
current in
per contactor
AC-3
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
1000 V
440 V
up to
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
4
5.5
9
11
15
4
5.5
5.5
7.5
9
10
11
15
15
18.5
5.5
7.5
10
15
18.5
–
–
–
–
–
Contactors supplied with coils
Catalog number. Complete
with code indicating control
circuit voltage a
DIN rail or screw mounting c
Weight
0.700 (1.55)
N/O
N/C
–
1
LC2-D09016kk q
kg (lb.)
1
–
LC2-D09116kk f
–
1
LC2-D12016kk q
1
–
LC2-D12116kk f
–
1
LC2-D18016kk q
1
–
LC2-D18116kk f
–
1
LC2-D25016kk q
1
–
LC2-D25116kk f
–
1
LC2-D32016kk q
1
–
LC2-D32116kk f
9
0.700 (1.55)
12
0.750 (1.67)
18
1.100 (2.44)
25
1.200 (2.67)
32
9
18.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
–
38
–
1
LC2-D38016kk q
1.200 (2.67)
30
55
59
59
75
80
75
115
–
–
LC2-D115006kk f
5.950 (13.22)
40
70
80
80
90
100
90
150
–
–
LC2-D150006kk f
6.000 (13.22)
3-pole reversing contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
Power connections to be made by the customer
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL Recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c LC2-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
LC2-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a Standard control circuit voltages, see page 24.
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating
coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
f Included with electrical contacts integrated in mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk02).
26
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection – Reversing Contactors for Motor Control
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
Control Circuit: AC
3-pole reversing contactors ring tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
Pre-wired power connections q f
Maximum horsepower ratings
Maximum inductive
current in AC-3
category 600 V
Instantantaneous
auxiliary contacts
per contactor
N/O
N/C
–
1
LC2-D09016kk q
1
–
LC2-D09116kk f
–
1
LC2-D12016kk q
1
–
LC2-D12116kk f
–
1
LC2-D18016kk q
1
–
LC2-D18116kk f
–
1
LC2-D25016kk q
1
–
LC2-D25116kk f
–
1
LC2-D32016kk q
1
–
LC2-D32116kk f
38
–
1
LC2-D38016kk q
1.200 (2.67)
1-phase 50/60 Hz
3-phase 50/60 Hz
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
A
0.5
1
2
2
5
7.5
9
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
5
3
5
7.5
10
3
5
7.5
10
7.5
10
15
20
10
15
20
30
Not UL listed or CSA certified
Not for North American applications
Contactors supplied with coils Weight
Catalog number. Complete
with code indicating control
circuit voltage a
DIN rail or screw mounting c
kg (lb.)
0.700 (1.55)
0.700 (1.55)
12
0.750 (1.67)
18
1.100 (2.44)
25
1.200 (2.67)
32
–
–
30
40
75
100
115
–
–
LC2-D115006kk f
5.950 (13.22)
–
–
15
15
40
40
150
–
–
LC2-D150006kk f
6.000 (13.22)
3-pole reversing contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
Power connections to be made by the customer
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL Recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c LC2-D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
LC2-D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a Standard control circuit voltages, see page 25.
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating
coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
f Included with electrical contacts integrated in mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk02).
27
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Selection – Reversing Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: DC
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole reversing contactors with Finger-safe™ terminals for power cabling
Includes pre-wired power connections q
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
LP2-D0901kk
LP2-D2501kk
Rated
operational
current in
AC-3
Instantantaneous
auxiliary contacts
per contactor
Contactors supplied with coils Weight
Catalog number. Complete with
code indicating control circuit
voltage a
DIN rail or screw mounting c
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
440 V
up to
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
N/O
N/C
2.2
4
4
4
5.5
5.5
9
–
1
LP2-D0901kk q
1.200 (2.67)
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
12
–
1
LP2-D1201kk q
1.200 (2.67)
4
7.5
9
9
10
10
18
–
1
LP2-D1801kk q
1.270 (2.82)
5.5
11
11
11
15
15
25
–
1
LP2-D2501kk q
1.750 (3.89)
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
–
1
LP2-D3201kk q
1.850 (4.11)
kg (lb.)
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c Clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aDC Coil Selection
Uc (Volts) DC
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
U 0.8 to 1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to 1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating
coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
28
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection – Reversing Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: DC
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
3-pole reversing contactors with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Includes pre-wired power connections q
Maximum horsepower ratings
LP2-D0901kk
LP2-D2501kk
Maximum
inductive
current in
AC-3
category
600 V
Instantantaneous
auxiliary contacts
per contactor
1-phase 50/60 Hz
3-phase 50/60 Hz
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
A
N/O
N/C
0.5
1
2
2
5
7.5
9
–
1
Contactors supplied with coils Weight
Catalog number. Complete with
code indicating control circuit
voltage a
DIN rail or screw mounting c
kg (lb.)
LP2-D0901kk q
1.200 (2.67)
1
2
3
3
7.5
10
12
–
1
LP2-D1201kk q
1.200 (2.67)
1
3
5
5
10
15
18
–
1
LP2-D1801kk q
1.270 (2.82)
2
3
7.5
7.5
15
20
25
–
1
LP2-D2501kk q
1.750 (3.89)
2
5
10
10
20
30
32
–
1
LP2-D3201kk q
1.850 (4.11)
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c Clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aDC Coil Selection
Uc (Volts) DC
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
U 0.8 to 1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to 1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating
coils by utilizing a N/C auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
29
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Selection – Reversing Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: DC
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole reversing contactors for ring tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
Includes pre-wired power connections
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
Rated
operational
current in
AC-3
Instantantaneous
auxiliary contacts
per contactor
Contactors supplied with coils Weight
Catalog number. Complete with
code indicating control circuit
voltage a
DIN rail or screw mounting c
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
440 V
up to
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
N/O
N/C
2.2
4
4
4
5.5
5.5
9
–
1
LP2-D09016kk q
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
12
–
1
LP2-D12016kk q
1.200 (2.67)
4
7.5
9
9
10
10
18
–
1
LP2-D18016kk q
1.270 (2.82)
kg (lb.)
1.200 (2.67)
5.5
11
11
11
15
15
25
–
1
LP2-D25016kk q
1.750 (3.89)
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
–
1
LP2-D32016kk q
1.850 (4.11)
3-pole reversing contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
Power connections to be made by the customer
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c Clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a DC Coil Selection
Uc (Volts) DC
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
U 0.8 to 1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to 1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating
coils by utilizing a N/C auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
30
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection – Reversing Contactors for Motor Control
Control Circuit: DC
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
3-pole reversing contactors for ring tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
Includes pre-wired power connections
Maximum horsepower ratings
Maximum
inductive
current in
AC-3
category
600 V
Instantantaneous
auxiliary contacts
per contactor
Contactors supplied with coils Weight
Catalog number. Complete with
code indicating control circuit
voltage a
DIN rail or screw mounting c
1-phase 50/60 Hz
3-phase 50/60 Hz
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
A
N/O
N/C
0.5
1
2
2
5
7.5
9
–
1
LP2-D09016kk q
1.200 (2.67)
1
2
3
3
7.5
10
12
–
1
LP2-D12016kk q
1.200 (2.67)
1
3
5
5
10
15
18
–
1
LP2-D18016kk q
1.270 (2.82)
2
3
7.5
7.5
15
20
25
–
1
LP2-D25016kk q
1.750 (3.89)
2
5
10
10
20
30
32
–
1
LP2-D32016kk q
1.850 (4.11)
kg (lb.)
3-pole reversing contactors for connection with slip-on connectors
Power connections to be made by the customer
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c Clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
a DC Coil Selection
Uc (Volts) DC
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
U 0.8 to 1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to 1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating
coils by utilizing a N/C auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
31
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Selection – Changeover Contactors for Resistive Loads
Control Circuit: DC
4-pole changeover contactors with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Includes pre-wired power connections
Utilization category AC-1
Instantaneous
Non inductive loads
auxiliary contacts
Maximum rated operational current (θ < 55 °C) per contactor
Contactors supplied with coils.
Catalog number. Complete with code
indicating control circuit voltage a
c DIN rail or screw mounting
Weight
LC2-D12004kk
A
N/O
N/C
25
–
–
LC2-D12004kk q
kg (lb.)
0.700 (1.42)
40
–
–
LC2-D25004kk q
1.100 (2.44)
60
–
–
LC2-D40004kk q
2.400 (5.33)
80
–
–
LC2-D65004kk q
3.200 (7.11)
125
–
–
LC2-D80004kk q
3.200 (7.11)
200
–
–
LC2-D115004kk f
7.250 (16.11) ???? lbs
4-pole changeover contactor pairs, for ring tongue terminals or bus bar connections
Includes pre-wired power connections
LP2-D65004kk
25
–
–
LC2-D120046kk q
0.700 (1.42)
40
–
–
LC2-D250046kk q
1.100 (2.44)
60
–
–
LC2-D400046kk q
2.400 (5.33)
80
–
–
LC2-D650046kk q
3.200 (7.11)
125
–
–
LC2-D800046kk q
3.200 (7.11)
200
–
–
LC2-D1150046kk f
6.450 (16.11) ???? lbs
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection with slip-on connectors
Power connections to be made by the customer
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors: UL recognized
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals.
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c LC2-D12 and D25: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
LC2-D40 to D80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC2-D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aDC Coil Selection
Uc (Volts) DC
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
U 0.8 to 1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to 1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating
coils by utilizing a N/C auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
32
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection – Changeover Contactors for Resistive Loads
Control circuit: DC
4-pole changeover contactor pairs with Fingersafe™ terminals for power cabling
Includes pre-wired power connections
Utilization category AC-1
Non inductive loads
Maximum rated operational
current (θ < 55 °C)
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
per contactor
A
N/O
N/C
25
–
–
LP2-D12004kk q
1.200 (2.67)
40
–
–
LC2-D25004kk q
1.750 (3.89)
Contactors supplied with coils
Catalog number. Complete with code indicating control
circuit voltage a
c DIN rail or screw mounting
Weight
LC2-D12004kk
kg (lb.)
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for ring tongue terminals or bus bar power connections
25
–
–
LC2-D120046kk q
1.200 (2.67)
40
–
–
LC2-D250046kk q
1.750 (3.89)
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection with slip-on connectors
Power connections to be made by the customer
LP2-D65004kk
For contactors LC1-D09 and LC1-D12 only, replace the last digit 6 in the above catalog numbers, with a 9.
Example: LC1-D09016kk becomes LC1-D09019kk.
These contactors include slip-on connectors:
E164862 NLDX2
2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil terminals.
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 42 to 49.
c LC2-D12 and D25: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting.
LC2-D40 to D80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DE or 75 mm ( DIN rail AM1-DL or screw mounting.
LC2-D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm ( DIN rails AM1-DP or screw mounting.
aDC Coil Selection
Uc (Volts) DC
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
U 0.8 to 1.1 Uc
JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
U 0.7 to 1.25 Uc
JW
BW
CW
EW
–
SW
FW
–
MW
–
–
Other voltages from 12 to 440 V, see pages 57 to 60.
q Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9Dkk978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating
coils by utilizing a N/C auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block.
33
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Combinations – Reversing contactors types LC2-D and LP2-D
Components for assembling reversing contactors and changeover contactor, for customer assembly
Mechanical interlocks
Reversers using
2 identical
contactors
horizontally
mounted type
Without electrical interlocking
With integral electrical interlocking
(2 x N.C. contacts)
3-pole reversing contactors
Sets of power connections
LC1-D09
LC1-D12
LC1-D18
LC1-D25
LC1-D32
LC1-D38
LA9-D09978
LA9-D0902
LA9-D1269
LA9-D1869
LA9-D2569
LA9-D3269
LA9-D50978
LA9-D4002
LA9-D6569
LA9-D6570 (4P)
LA9-D8069
LA9-D8070 (4P)
LP1-D09
LP1-D12
LP1-D18
LP1-D25
LP1-D32
LC1-D40
LC1-D50
LC1-D65
LP1-D40
LP1-D50
LP1-D65
LC1-D80
LC1-D95
LP1-D80
LA9-D80978
LA9-D8002
LA9-D8069
LA9-D8070 (4P
LC1-D115
LC1-D150
Not available
LA9-D11502
LA9-D11569
LA9-D11571 (3P)
LA9-D11570 (4P) (D115 only)
34
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
A1
2N
LA9-D1270 (4P)
LA9-D2570 (4P)
A2
5 2/L3
7
8
3 2/L2
4
L2
N
1 2/L1
2
L1
6
1N
7
8
L3
3 1/L2
5 1/L3
6
1 1/L1
4
A1
6
2
3
5
4
V
W
A2
1
2
A1
5
6
A2
L3
3
U
L2
1
4
A1
A2
3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
2
L1
Contactors
Selection
Components for assembling reversing contactors and changeover contactors, horizontally
mounted, for customer assembly
Component parts (including mechanical interlock with integrated electrical contacts)
With 2 identical contactors c
Set of power connections
Catalog number
Weight
kg (lb.)
Mechanical interlock kit
Catalog number
Weight
kg (lb.)
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
LC1/LP1-D09/D12
LA9-D1269
0.015 (0.033)
LA9-D0902
0.060 (0.132)
LC1/LP1-D18
LA9-D1869
0.030 (0.066)
LA9-D0902
0.060 (0.132)
LC1/LP1-D25
LA9-D2569
0.030 (0.066)
LA9-D0902
0.060 (0.132)
LC1/LP1-D32/D38
LA9-D3269
0.040 (0.088)
LA9-D0902
0.060 (0.132)
LA9-D6569
0.290 (0.638)
LA9-D4002
0.170 (0.374)
LC1-D8011/D9511
LA9-D8069
0.490 (1.078)
LA9-D4002
0.170 (0.374)
LP1-D8011
LA9-D8069
0.490 (1.078)
LA9-D8002
0.170 (0.374)
LC1-D115/D150
LA9-D11569
1.450 (3.190)
LA9-D11502
0.290 (0.638)
0.960 (2.112)
LA9-D11502
0.290 (0.638)
LC1/LP1-D4011/D5011
LC1/LP1-D6511
For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactors
LC1-D115/D150
LA9-D11571
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactors (3-phase + neutral distribution system)
LC1/LP1-D12004
LA9-D1270
0.010 (0.022)
LA9-D0902
0.060 (0.132)
LC1/LP1-D25004
LA9-D2570
0.020 (0.044)
LA9-D0902
0.060 (0.132)
LC1/LP1-D40004/D65004
LA9-D6570
0.150 (0.330)
LA9-D4002
0.170 (0.374)
LC1-D80004
LA9-D8070
0.280 (0.616)
LA9-D4002
0.170 (0.374)
LP1-D80004
LA9-D8070
0.280 (0.616)
LA9-D8002
0.170 (0.374)
LC1-D115004
LA9-D11570
1.260 (2.772)
LA9-D11502
0.290 (0.638)
Component parts (including mechanical interlock without electrical contacts)
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
LC1/LP1-D0901/D1201
LA9-D1269
0.015 (0.033)
LA9-D09978
0.030 (0.066)
LC1/LP1-D1801
LA9-D1869
0.030 (0.066)
LA9-D09978
0.030 (0.066)
LC1/LP1-D2501
LA9-D2569
0.030 (0.066)
LA9-D09978
0.030 (0.066)
LC1/LP1-D3201/D3801
LA9-D324011
0.040 (0.088)
LA9-D09978
0.030 (0.066)
LC1/LP1-D4011/D5011
LC1/LP1-D6511
LA9-D6569
0.290 (0.638)
LA9-D50978
0.155 (0.341)
LC1-D8011/D9511
LA9-D8069
0.490 (1.078)
LA9-D50978
0.155 (0.341)
LP1-D8011
LA9-D8069
0.490 (1.078)
LA9-D80978
0.180 (0.396)
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactors (3-phase + neutral distribution system) a
LC1/LP1-D12004
LA9-D1270
0.010 (0.022)
LA9-D09978
0.030 (0.066)
LC1/LP1-D25004
LA9-D2570
0.020 (0.044)
LA9-D09978
0.030 (0.066)
LC1/LP1-D40004/D65004
LA9-D6570
0.150 (0.330)
LA9-D50978
0.155 (0.341)
LC1-D80004
LA9-D8070
0.280 (0.616)
LA9-D50978
0.155 (0.341)
LP1-D80004
LA9-D8070
0.280 (0.616)
LA9-D80978
0.180 (0.396)
c To order the 2 contactors: see pages 12 to 23.
a Order 2 contact blocks LA8-DNk1 or LA1-DNk1 to obtain electrical interlockingof operating coils. See pages 42 and 43.
35
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Characteristics
Auxiliary contact blocks without dust and damp protected contacts
Type
LA1-D
LA2-D
LA3-D
LA8-D c
Environment
Meets the essential requirements
of the LV & EMC directives
Conforming to standards
E164862
CCN NLDX
Approvals
IEC 337-1, 947-1, 947-5, 947-5-1, NF C 63-140.
VDE 0660, BS 4794
LR43364
Class 3211 04
ASE, UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, FI
Protective treatment
Conforming to IEC 68
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Protection against direct finger contact IP2X
Storage
- 60 to + 80°C (-76 to +176°F)
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Maximum operating altitude
“TH”
For operation at 80 to 110% of nominal control voltage
- 5 to + 55°C (+23 to +131°F)
Permissible for operation at nominal control voltage
- 40 to + 70°C (-40 to +158°F)
Without derating
3000m (8900 ft.)
Cabling
1 or 2 conductors
Stranded or solid cable with or without cable end
Tightening torque
Phillips head No.2 or Ø 6 mm (3/16 in.) screwdriver
AWG
18 to 14
mm2
1 to 2.5
0.8 Nkm (7 lb. in.)
Instantaneous and time delay contacts
Number of contacts
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated thermal current (Ith)
2 or 4
Up to
V
660
Conforming to IEC 947-1
V
690
Conforming to VDE 0110 group C
V
750
Conforming to CSA
V
600
For ambient temperature ≤ 40 °C (104°F)
A
10
Frequency of operational current
Hz
25 to 400
U min
V
17
5
2
2
2
Minimum switching capacity
I min
mA
Short-circuit protection
To IEC 947-5-1 and VDE 0660. gG fuse.
A
10
Rated making capacity
Conforming to IEC 947-5-1
I rms
A
AC: 140; DC: 250
1s
A
100
Short time rating
Permissible for
500 ms
A
120
100 ms
A
140
Insulation resistance
MΩ
> 10
Non-overlap time
Guaranteed between N.C. and N.O. contacts
ms
1.5 (on opening and closing)
Overlap time
Guaranteed between N.C. and N.O. on LA1-DC22
ms
1.5
–
–
Ambient air temperature for operation
–
- 40 to + 70°C
(-40 to +158°F)
- 40 to + 70°C
(-40 to +158°F)
–
Repeat accuracy
–
±2%
±2%
–
Drift up to 0.5 million operating cycles
–
+ 15 %
+ 15 %
–
–
0.25 % per °C
0.25 % per °F
0.25 % per °C
0.25 % per °F
–
30
5
5
30
Time delay
(LA2-D and LA3-D contact blocks)
Accuracy only valid for setting range
indicated on the front face
Drift depending on ambient air temperature
Mechanical durability
In millions of operating cycles
Operational power of contacts
See page 37
c For use on contactors LC1-D and LP1-D only.
36
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Characteristics
Auxiliary contact blocks without dust and damp protected contacts
Operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 947-5-1)
AC supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15
Electrical durability (up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet:
making power (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos ϕ 0.4).
V
24
48
110/127
220/ 230
380/400
440
600
1 million operating cycles
VA
150
300
400
480
500
500
500
3 million operating cycles
VA
80
170
250
290
320
320
320
10 million operating cycles
VA
30
65
90
120
130
130
130
Occasional making capacity
VA
1200
2600
7000
13 000
15 000
13 000
9000
1 Breaking limit of contacts for: maximum of 50 operating cycles at 10 s intervals
(breaking power = making power x cos ϕ 0.7).
10 000
8000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2 Electrical durability of contacts:
- for 1 million operating cycles (2a).
- for 3 million operating cycles (2b).
- for 10 million operating cycles (2c).
1
2000
4 Thermal limit.
1000
800
600
500
400
300
4
200
2a
100
80
60
2b
2c
40
24
110
120
48
220
380 500
440 690 V
DC supply, category DC-13
Electrical durability (up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time
constant increasing with the power.
V
24
48
110
220
440
600
1 million operating cycles
W
120
90
75
68
61
58
3 million operating cycles
W
70
50
38
33
28
27
10 million operating cycles
W
25
18
14
12
10
9
Occasional making capacity
W
1000
700
400
260
220
170
1000
2 Electrical durability of contacts:
- for 1 million operating cycles (2a).
- for 3 million operating cycles (2b).
- for 10 million operating cycles (2c).
4
700
500
300
250
200
200
100
80
60
50
40
30
140
100
3 Breaking limit of contacts for: maximum of 20 operating cycles
at 10 s intervals and with current passing for 0.5 s per operating cycle.
3
4 Thermal limit.
2a
2b
20
2c
50
10
8
6
20
12
24
48
110
220
440 600 V
37
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Characteristics
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts
Type
LA1-DX
LA1-DZ
LA1-DY
“TH”
“TH”
Environment
Meets the essential requirements
of the LV & EMC directives
Conforming to standards
E164862
CCN NLDX
Approvals
IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660
LR43364
Class 3211 04
UL, CSA
Protective treatment
Conforming to IEC 68
“TH”
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Protection against direct finger contact IP2X
Ambient air temperature around
the device
Storage
- 25 to + 70°C
(-13 to +158°F)
- 25 to + 70°C
(-13 to +158°F)
- 25 to + 70°C
(-13 to +158°F)
Operation
- 25 to + 70°C
(-13 to +158°F)
- 25 to + 70°C
(-13 to +158°F)
- 25 to + 70°C
(-13 to +158°F)
AWG
18 to 14
18 to 14
18 to 14
mm2
1 to 2.5
1 to 2.5
1 to 2.5
0.8 Nkm (7 lb. in.)
0.8 Nkm (7 lb. in.)
0.8 Nkm (7 lb. in.)
2
4 (2 non dust & damp
protected)
2
24
Cabling
Tightening torque
1 or 2 conductors
Stranded or solid cable with or without cable end
Phillips head No.2 or Ø 6 mm (3/16 in.) flat blade screwdriver
Number of contacts
Characteristics of dust and damp protected contacts
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Up to
V
50
50
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC 947 5-1
V
250
250
250
mA
500
500
50
U min
V
17
17
3
I min
mA
4
4
0.3
MΩ
> 10
> 10
> 10
5
5
5
Silver
Single break
Gold
Single break with
crossed bars
Maximum operational current (Ie)
Minimum switching capacity
Insulation resistance
Mechanical durability
In millions of operating cycles
Materials and technology used for
dust and damp protected contacts
Silver
Single break
Characteristics of non dust and damp protected contacts
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Up to
V
–
690
–
Conforming to IEC 947 5-1
V
–
690
–
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated thermal current (Ith)
Conforming to UL/CSA
V
–
600
–
For ambient temperature ≤ 40 °C
A
–
10
–
Hz
–
25 to 400
–
U min
V
–
17
–
Frequency of operational current
Minimum switching capacity
I min
mA
–
5
–
Short-circuit protection
Conforming to IEC 947 5-1. gG fuse
A
–
10
–
Rated making capacity
Conforming to IEC 947 5-1
I rms
A
–
c: 140; a: 250
–
1s
A
–
100
–
500 ms
A
–
120
–
100 ms
A
–
140
–
Insulation resistance
MΩ
–
> 10
–
Operational power of contacts
See page 37
Short time rating
Permissible for
38
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Characteristics
Interface Modules
Environment
Meets the essential requirements of the LV &
EMC directives
Conforming to
standards
File 164353
CCN NKCR
IEC 255-5
Protective treatment
Conforming to IEC 68
“TH”
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Protection against direct finger contact IP2X
Storage
- 40 to + 80°C (-40 to +176°F)
Ambient air
temperature
around the device
Operation at 80 to 110% of nominal control voltage
- 25 to + 55°C (-13 to +131°F)
Permissible for operation at Uc
- 25 to + 70°C (-13 to +158°F)
LR43364
Class 3211 04
Other characteristics
Type
LA4-DFBQ
LA4-DFB
LA4-DFE
LA4-DLB
With relay
With relay
With relay
With relay + override
Solid state
24DC
Rated insulation
voltage
Conforming to IEC 947-1
V
400
250
Rated operational
voltage
Conforming to IEC 947-1
V
400
250
Indication of input
state
By integral LED which illuminates when the contactor coil is energized
LA4-DLE
Control voltage (E1-E2)
V
24 DC
24 DC
48 DC
24 DC
48 DC
Permissible variation
V
17 to 30
17 to 30
33 to 60
17 to 30
33 to 60
LA4-DWB
5 to 30
8.5 for 5V
Current consumption at 20 °C
mA
25
25
15
25
15
U
V
< 2.4
< 2.4
< 4.8
< 2.4
< 4.8
< 2.4
I
mA
<2
<2
< 1.3
<2
< 1.3
<2
U
V
17
17
33
17
33
5
Input signals
15 for 24 V
State “0” guaranteed for
State “1” guaranteed for
Built-in protections
Electrical durability
at 220/240 V
Against reversed polarity
By diode
Of the input
By diode
In millions of operating cycles
Maximum immunity
to micro-breaks
Power dissipated
For use with
contactor
At 20 °C
3
10
10
3
3
20
ms
4
4
4
4
4
0.6
0.6
0.6
W
1
0.6
0.6
24 to 250 V DC coil
–
LP1-D09 to D32
–
24 to 250 V coil AC
–
LC1-D09 to D150
LC1-D09 to
D38
100 to 250 V coil AC
–
–
LC1-D40 to
D115
380 to 415 V coil AC
LC1-D09 to
D150
–
–
With
0.4
Operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode.
The closing time “C” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles.
The opening time “O” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Total operating time
at Uc
(of the contactor)
LC1-D09 to
D18
LC1-D25 to
D38
LC1-D40 to
D65
LC1-D80 and
D95
LP1-D09 to
D18
LP1-D25 and
D32
“C”
ms
20 to 30
23 to 32
28 to 34
28 to 43
48 to 56
60 to 72
“O”
ms
16 to 24
17 to 31
20 to 24
18 to 32
18 to 26
20 to 26
AWG
18 to 14
mm2
1 to 2.5
With LA4-DF, DL
Cabling
1 or 2 conductors
Stranded or solid cable with or without cable end
Tightening torque
Phillips head No.2 or Ø 6 mm (3/16 in.) flat blade
screwdriver
0.8 Nkm (7 lb. in.)
39
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Characteristics
Electronic serial timer modules
Type
LA4-DT (On-delay)
LA4-DR (Off-delay) for LC1-D
Environment
Meets the essential requirements of the
LV & EMC directives
Conforming to standards
E164862
CCN NLDX
Approvals
IEC 255-5
LR43364
Class 3211 04
UL, CSA
Protective treatment
Conforming to IEC 68
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Protection against direct finger contact IP2X
Storage
- 40 to + 80°C (-40 to +176°F)
Ambient air temperature
around the device
“TH”
Operation at 80 to 110% of nominal control voltage
- 25 to + 55°C (-13 to +131°F)
Permissible for operation at Uc
- 25 to + 70°C (-13 to +158°F)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
To IEC 947-1 and VDE 0110
(group C)
Cabling
1 or 2 conductors
Stranded or solid cable with or without cable end
Tightening torque
Phillips n° 2 or Ø 6 mm (3/16 in.) flat blade screwdriver
0.8 Nkm (7 lb.-in.)
On input
By varistor
By varistor
Suppression of contactor
By varistor
By bidirectional peak limiting diode
V
250
AWG
18 to 14
mm2
1 to 2.5
Control circuit characteristics
Built-in protection
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
V
24 to 250 AC or DC
24 to 250 DC
Permissible variation
0.8 to 1.1 Uc
0.8 to 1.1 Uc
Type of control
By mechanical contact only
By mechanical contact only connecting
cable < 10 m (30 ft.)
Time delay characteristics
Timing ranges
s
Repeat accuracy
0 to 40 °C
Reset time
Immunity to micro-breaks
0.1 to 2; 1.5 to 30; 25 to 500
± 3 % (10 ms minimum)
± 3 % (10 ms minimum)
During the time delay period
ms
150
225
After the time delay period
ms
50
–
During the time delay period
ms
10
20
After the time delay period
ms
2
–
ms
–
40
Illuminates during time delay period
Illuminates during time delay period
3.5
Minimum control pulse duration
Indication of time delay
0.1 to 2; 1.5 to 30; 25 to 500
By LED
Switching characteristics (solid state type)
Maximum power dissipated
W
2
Leakage current
mA
<5
<5
Residual voltage
V
3.3
3.3
3 kV; 0.5 joule
3 kV; 0.5 joule
30
30
Short-circuit protection
Electrical durability
In millions of operating cycles
Operating diagrams
LA4-DT “on-delay” electronic timers
U supply
(A1-A2)
Time delay output
Contactor coil
1
0
LA4-DR “off-delay” electronic timers
≥ 40 ms
U supply
1
0
(A1-A2)
1
0
(A2-B2)
Control
t
Red LED
1
0
1
0
t
Time delay output
Contactor coil
Red LED
40
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Characteristics
Control modules, coil suppressor modules and mechanical latch block
Environment
Meets the essential requirements
of the LV & EMC directives
Approvals
File 164353
CCN NKCR
LR43364
Class 3211 04
Protective treatment
Conforming to IEC 68
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Protection against direct finger contact IP2X
Storage
- 40 to + 80°C (-40 to +176°F)
Ambient air temperature
around the device
“TH”
Operation at 80 to 110% of nominal control voltage
- 25 to + 55°C (-13 to +131°F)
Permissible for operation at Uc
- 25 to + 70°C (-13 to +158°F)
Automatic - Manual - Stop modules
LA4-DM
Recommendation
The Auto-Man selector switch must only be operated with the Start-Stop (“O” - “I”) switch in position “O”
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to IEC 947-1
V
Rated operational voltage
Conforming to IEC 947-1
V
250
Protection
Against electric shocks
kV
2
250
Built-in protection
Contactor coil suppression
By varistor
Indication
By integral LED
Illuminates when the contactor coil is energized
Electrical durability
In operating cycles
20 000
Coil suppressor modules
Type
Type of protection
Rated control circuit
voltage (Uc)
V
Maximum peak voltage
LA4-DA
LA4-DB
LA4-DC
RC circuit
Bidirectional peak
limiting diode
LA4-DE
Diode
Varistor
24 to 415 AC
24 to 72
AC or DC
24 to 250 DC
24 to 250
AC or DC
300% nominal
voltage
200% nominal
voltage
100% nominal
voltage
200% nominal
voltage
24/48 V
Hz
400
–
–
–
50/127 V
Hz
200
–
–
–
110/240 V
Hz
100
–
–
–
380/415 V
Hz
150
–
–
–
Natural RC frequency
Mechanical latch block characteristics
Type
LA6-DK10
LA6-DK20
LC1-D09 to D65
LC1-D80 to D150
LP1-D09 to D65
LP1-D80
UL, CSA
UL, CSA
690
For mounting on contactor
Approval
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to IEC 947
V
690
Rated control circuit voltage
50/60 Hz AC and DC
V
24 to 415
24 to 415
AC
VA
25
25
DC
W
30
30
Power required
For unlatching
Maximum operating rate
In operating cycles per hour
On-load factor
Mechanical durability at Uc
In millions of operating cycles
1200
1200
10 %
10 %
0.5
0.5
Unlatching can be manually operated or electrically controlled (pulsed).
The LA6-DK does not include a coil clearing contact. The latch coil and the LC1-D operating coil must not be energized or maintained simultaneously.
Duration of control signals ≥ 100 ms.
41
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Auxiliary Contact Blocks
-127V
110 -DC z
AC 60H
50/
E1
0
E2
LA6
DK10
LA1-DN10, DN01
LA6-DK
LA8-DN
LA1-DN
LC1-LP1
LA8-DN
LA1-DN, DC
LA2-DT, DS
LA3-DR
LA1-DX, DY, DZ
42
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection - Auxiliary Contact Blocks
For type LCk-D and LPk-D: Auxiliary contact blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks
For use in normal operating environments
Number of
contacts per
block
Clip-on mounting on contactor
1
LC1-D25 to D95
Front mount
Auxiliary Contacts
Side mount
–
c
–
f
2
–
LC1-D09 to D150
LP1-D09 to D32
–
–
–
–
–
–
N/O
N/C
1
–
LA1-DN10 a
0.020 (0.044)
kg (lbs.)
–
1
LA1-DN01 a
0.020 (0.044)
1
1
LA1-DN11
0.030 (0.066)
2
–
LA1-DN20
0.030 (0.066)
–
2
LA1-DN02
0.030 (0.066)
1
1
LA8-DN11 q
0.030 (0.066)
2
–
LA8-DN20 q
0.030 (0.066)
2
2
LA1-DN22
0.050 (0.11)
1
3
LA1-DN13
0.050 (0.11)
4
–
LA1-DN40
0.050 (0.11)
–
4
LA1-DN04
0.050 (0.11)
3
1
LA1-DN31
0.050 (0.11)
2
2
LA1-DC22 a
0.050 (0.11)
–
4
LC1-D09 to D150
LP1-D09 to D80
Weight
–
LP1-D25 to D80
LC1-D09 to D150
LP1-D09 to D80
Catalog number
–
With terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012
2
LC1-D0910 to D3810
–
–
–
1
1
LA1-DN11M
0.030 (0.066)
–
–
–
1
1
LA1-DN11P
0.030 (0.066)
–
–
–
1
1
LA1-DN11G
0.030 (0.066)
–
–
–
2
2
LA1-DN22M
0.050 (0.11)
–
–
–
1
3
LA1-DN13M
0.050 (0.11)
–
–
–
3
1
LA1-DN31M
0.050 (0.11)
–
–
–
2
2
LA1-DN22P
0.050 (0.11)
–
–
–
1
3
LA1-DN13P
0.050 (0.11)
–
–
–
3
1
LA1-DN31P
0.050 (0.11)
–
–
–
2
2
LA1-DN22G
LP1-D0910 to to D3210
LC1/LP1-D0900 to D3200
LC1-D11500/D15000
LC1-D4011 to D9511
LP1-D4011 to D8011
4
LC1-D0910 to D3810
LP1-D0910 to D3210
LC1/LP1-D0900 to D3200
LC1-D11500/D15000
LC1-D4011 to D9511
LP1-D4011 to D8011
0.050 (0.11)
0.050 (0.11)
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts
For use in harsh industrial environments
2
4
a
q
f
c
LC1-D09 to D150
24 to 50 V
2
–
–
–
LA1-DX20
0.040 (0.088)
LP1-D09 to D80
5 to 24 V
2
2
–
–
LA1-DY20 f
0.040 (0.088)
LC1-D09 to D150
24 to 50 V
2
–
2
–
LA1-DZ40
0.050 (0.11)
LP1-D09 to D80
24 to 50 V
2
–
1
1
LA1-DZ31
0.060 (0.132)
Maximum number of blocks per contactor: 1 block from D25 to D38, 2 blocks from D40 to D95.
Set of shims required for mounting on LC1-D40 to D95, to be ordered separately, see page 52.
Supplied with 4 grounding terminal connections.
Dust-tight auxiliary contacts (IP54) NEMA 12 rating.
43
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Seriplex Module, Time Delay Blocks and Mechanical Latch Blocks
-127V
110 -DC z
AC 60H
50/
E1
0
LA1-DN10, DN01
E2
LA6
DK10
LA6-DK
LA1-DN10, DN01
LA8-DN
LA1-DN
LA8-DN
LC1-LP1
LA1-DN, DC
LA2-DT, DS
LA4-SPX
LA3-DR
LA1-DX, DY, DZ
44
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection
Seriplex module, time delay auxiliary contact blocks and mechanical latch blocks
Seriplex
1 block per contactor
Clip-on front mounting
Seriplex
Operates coils up to
File E114926
CCN NRAQ
Approvals
Contactor adaptor t
module
LR53531
Class 2252 01
LC1-D09 to D80
277 VAC
LP1-D09 to D80
24 VDC
LA4-SPX
0.072 (0.160)
Catalog number c
Weight
0.1 to 3 s a
LA2-DT0
0.060 (0.132)
0.1 to 30 s
LA2-DT2
0.060 (0.132)
10 to 180 s
LA2-DT4
0.060 (0.132)
1 to 30 s q
LA2-DS2
0.060 (0.132)
0.1 to 3 s a
LA3-DR0
0.060 (0.132)
0.1 to 30 s
LA3-DR2
0.060 (0.132)
10 to 180 s
LA3-DR4
0.060 (0.132)
1 block per contactor
Clip-on front mounting
Catalog number to be
completed f
Weight
LC1-D09 to D65
LP1-D09 to D65
LA6-DK10k
0.070 (0.154)
LC1-D80 to D150
LP1-D80
LA6-DK20k
0.090 (0.198)
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks
Number of contacts
1 block per contactor
Time delay
Clip-on front mounting
Type
Setting range
kg (lb.)
On-delay
LC1-D09 to D150
LP1-D09 to D80
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
Off-delay
Mechanical latch blocks
Unlatching control
kg (lb.)
Manual or electric
c
a
q
f
Sealing cover, LA9-D901 to be ordered separately, see page 52.
With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
With switching time of 40 ms ± 15 ms between opening of the N.C. and closing of the N.O. contact.
Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult our local representatives or agents).
Volts 50/60
Hz, a
24
32/36
42/48
60/72
100
110/127
220/240
256/277
380/415
Code
B
C
E
EN
K
F
M
U
Q
t For more information refer to Seriplex catalog 833OCT9601
45
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Selection - Electronic Timers and Interface Modules
LA4-DR
LA4-DT
LA4-DF
LA4-DL
LA4-DW
LA4-DM
LC1-D
LA4-DT
LA4-DL
LA4-DF
LA4-DM
LP1-D
46
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection
Electronic Timers and Interface Modules
Electronic serial timer modules c
The solid state modules delay the energizing and de-energizing of the contactor coil.
a Operational voltage to energize contactor coil
AC
Time delay
Catalog number
Weight
DC
24 to 250 V
100 to 250 V
24 to 250 V
D40 to D150
D09 to D32
kg (lb.)
On-delay type
D09 to D38
0.1 to 2 s
LA4-DT0U
0.040 (0.088)
1.5 to 30 s
LA4-DT2U
0.040 (0.088)
25 to 500 s
LA4-DT4U
0.040 (0.088)
0.1 to 2 s
LA4-DR0U
0.050 (0.11)
1.5 to 30 s
LA4-DR2U
0.050 (0.11)
25 to 500 s
LA4-DR4U
0.050 (0.11)
Input signal voltage DC
Catalog number
Weight
Off-delay type
D09 to D18
D25 to D150
–
Interface modules c
Operational voltage to energize contactor coil
AC
24 to 250 V
DC
100 to 250 V
380 to 415 V
24 to 250 V
–
D09 to D150
–
E1-E2
kg (lb.)
Relay interface
–
D09 to D150
–
–
24 V
LA4-DFBQ
0.055 (0.121)
24 V
LA4-DFB
0.055 (0.121) !??!
48 V
LA4-DFE
0.055 (0.121) !??!
24 V
LA4-DLB
0.045 (0.099)
48 V
LA4-DLE
0.045 (0.099)
24 V
LA4-DWB
0.045 (0.099)
Catalog number
Weight
D09 to D32
Relay interface with manual override switch (output forced “ON”)
D09 to D150
–
–
D09 to D32
Solid state interface
D09 to D38
D40 to D115
–
–
Auto-Man-Stop control modules c
For local override operation tests with 2-position “Auto-Man” switch and “O-I” switch
Operational voltage to energize contactor coil
AC
DC
24 to 100 V
100 to 250 V
24 to 100 V
100 to 250 V
D09 to D150
–
D09 to D32
–
LA4-DMK
0.040 (0.088)
kg (lb.)
–
D09 to D150
–
D09 to D32
LA4-DMU
0.040 (0.088)
c Mounted directly on terminals A1 and A2 screws.
a For 24 V, operation, the contactor must be fitted with a 21 V coil (code Z5 for 50 Hz, Z6 for 60 Hz or ZD for DC).
47
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Coil Suppressor Modules
LA4-Di1
LA4-Di2
LC1-D
LA4-Di1
LA4-Di2, Di3
LP1-D
48
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection
Coil suppressor modules
RC circuits (resistor-capacitor) c
Mounted at top
of contactor
on coil terminals A1
and A2
Clip-on mounting and
connection without
tools to the contactor
coil terminals.
Mounting of an input
module is still possible
Screw connection to
the contactor coil
terminals. Mounting ot
the input module not
possible.
For use with contactor a
Rating
Reference
Weight
Type
AC
DC
V
V
24 to 48
–
LA4-DA1E
0.012 (0.026)
50 to 127
–
LA4-DA1G
0.012 (0.026)
110 to 240
–
LA4-DA1U
0.012 (0.026)
24 to 48
–
LA4-DA2E
0.018 (0.039)
50 to 127
–
LA4-DA2G
0.018 (0.039)
110 to 240
–
LA4-DA2U
0.018 (0.039)
380 to 415
–
LA4-DA2N
0.018 (0.039)
kg
D09 to D38
D09 to D150
Varistors (peak limiting) q
Clip-on mounting and
electrical connection.
Mounting of an input
module is still possible
24 to 48
24 to 48
LA4-DE1E
0.012 (0.026)
50 to 127
50 to 127
LA4-DE1G
0.012 (0.026)
110 to 250
110 to 250
LA4-DE1U
0.012 (0.026)
24 to 48
24 to 48
LA4-DE2E
0.018 (0.039)
50 to 127
50 to 127
LA4-DE2G
0.018 (0.039)
110 to 250
110 to 250
LA4-DE2U
0.018 (0.039)
24 to 48
–
LA4-DE2E
0.018 (0.039)
50 to 127
–
LA4-DE2G
0.018 (0.039)
110 to 250
–
LA4-DE2U
0.018 (0.039)
–
24 to 48
LA4-DE3E
0.018 (0.039)
–
50 to 127
LA4-DE3G
0.018 (0.039)
–
110 to 250
LA4-DE3U
0.018 (0.039)
D09 to D32
–
12 to 250
LA4-DC1U
0.012 (0.026)
D09 to D32
–
12 to 250
LA4-DC2U
0.018 (0.039)
D40 to D80
–
24 to 250
LA4-DC3U
0.018 (0.039)
D09 to D38
D09 to D38
Screw mounting
D40 to D115
D40 to D115
Diodes f
Clip-on mounting and
electrical connection.
Mounting of an input
module is still possible
Screw mounting
Bidirectional peak limiting diode t
Clip-on mounting and
electrical connection.
Mounting of an input
module is still possible
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
D09 to D95
Screw connection to
the contactor coil
terminals. Mounting ot
the input module not
possible.
D09 to D32
D40 to D80
24
–
LA4-DB1B
0.012 (0.026)
72
–
LA4-DB1S
0.012 (0.026)
–
24
LA4-DB1B
0.012 (0.026)
–
72
LA4-DB1S
0.012 (0.026)
24
–
LA4-DB2B
0.018 (0.039)
72
–
LA4-DB2S
0.018 (0.039)
–
24
LA4-DB2B
0.018 (0.039)
–
72
LA4-DB2S
0.018 (0.039)
–
24
LA4-DB3B
0.018 (0.039)
–
72
LA4-DB3S
0.018 (0.039)
c Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to “high frequency” interference. For use only in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. - 5%
total harmonic distortion.
Voltage limited to 3 Uc max and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
a For satisfactory protection, a suppressor module must be fitted across the coil of each contactor.
q Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.
Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
f No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time).
Polarised component.
t Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.
Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
49
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Selection - Contactors and Reversing Contactors
LA9-D1860
LA9-D80961
LA9-D1260
LA9-D40961
LA9-D3260
LA9-D2560
LA9-D80962
LA9-D1261
LA9-D40963
LA9-D2561
LA9-D80963
LA9-D1262
LA9-D8067
LA9-D6567
LA9-D2563
LC1-D32, D38
LP1-D32
LA9-D1263
LC1-D18
LP1-D18
LC1-D80, D95
LP1-D80
LC1-D40, D50, D65
LP1-D40, D50, D65
LC1-D25
LP1-D25
LA9-D92
LA9-D93
LC1-D09, D12
LP1-D09, D12
LA9-D941
50
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection - Contactors and Reversing Contactors
Types LCk-D and LPk-D
Accessories for main pole and control connections
For use on contactors
Sold in lots of
Catalog number
Weight
Description
LC1
4-pole 10 mm2
Connectors for larger
cable sizes
LA9-D1860
3-pole 25 mm2
mm2
LP1
kg (lb.)
D09, D12
D09, D12
1
LA9-D1260
0.030 (0.066)
D18
D18
1
LA9-D1860
0.035 (0.077)
D2500
D32, D38
D32
1
LA9-D3260
0.040 (0.088)
D25
D25
1
LA9-D2560
0.050 (0.11)
IP20 Finger-safe™
terminals for stranded
or solid cable
3-pole 120 mm2
D115, D150
D115, D150
1
LA9-D115603
0.540 (0.188)
4-pole 120 mm2
D115
D115
1
LA9-D115604
0.730 (1.606)
Connectors for ring
tongue terminals or
bus bar
3-pole
D115, D150
D115, D150
1
LA9-D115503
0.230 (0.506)
4-pole
D115
D115
1
LA9-D115504
0.320 (0.704)
4-pole 25
D09, D12
D09, D12
10
LA9-D1261
0.012 (0.046)
D25
D25
10
LA9-D2561
0.060 (0.132)
D40 to D65
D40 to D65
2
LA9-D40961
0.021 (0.046)
D80, D95
D80
2
LA9-D80961
0.060 (0.132)
D09, D12
D09, D12
10
LA9-D1262
0.003 (0.006)
D80, D95
D80
1
LA9-D80962
0.080 (0.176)
D09, D12
D09, D12
2
LA9-D1263
0.024 (0.053)
D25
D25
2
LA9-D2563
0.017 (0.037)
D40 to D65
D40 to D65
2
LA9-D40963
0.070 (0.154)
D80, D95
D80
2
LA9-D80963
0.100 (0.22)
–
D40 to D80
10
LA9-D09966
0.006 (0.013)
D40 to D65
10
LA9-D6567
0.010 (0.022)
D80
10
LA9-D8067
0.010 (0.022)
D11500.
D15000
3
GV7-AC03
0.180 (0.040)
2 poles
Links for parallel
connection of
3 poles (Wye-delta
shorting strap)
LA9-D11550k
4 poles
Staggered coil connection
Control circuit take-off from main pole
LA9-D11560k
Spreaders for increasing
the pole pitch to 45 mm
–
D11500,
D15000
LA9-D1262
LA9-D80962
LA9-D6567
51
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Selection - Contactors and Reversing Contactors
Contactors and reversing contactors types LCk-D and LPk-D
Sets of contacts
For contactor
Type
Catalog number
Weight
kg (lb.)
LC1-D11500
LA5-D1158031
0.220 (0.484)
LC1-D15000
LA5-D115803
0.220 (0.484)
LC1-D115004
LA5-D115804
0.280 (0.616)
LC1-D11500
LA5-D11550
0.360 (0.792)
LC1-D15000
LA5-D15050
0.360 (0.792)
LC1-D115004
LA5-D115450
0.460 (1.012)
3-pole
4-pole
Arc chamber
3-pole
4-pole
Accessories for protection and marking
Description
For use on
Sold in lots of
Contactors
LA9-D941
Add-on blocks
Catalog
number
Weight
AC
DC
Miniature fuse holder
type 5 x 20 with 4 A-250 V fuse
kg (lb.)
D09 to D150
D09 to D80
–
1
LA9-D941
0.025 (0.055)
Legend holder
8 x 22 mm snap-in
D09 to D150
D09 to D80
LA1-D
(4 contacts)
LA2-D, LA3-D, LA6-DK
100
LA9-D92
0.001 (0.002)
Legend holder
8 x 17 mm snap-in
–
–
LA1-DN
(2 contacts)
100
LA9-D90
0.001 (0.002)
Bag of 300 labels
(blank, self-adhesive) 7 x 21 mm
D09 to D150
D09 to D80
LA1-D
(4 contacts)
LA2-D, LA3-D, LA6-DK
1
LA9-D93
0.001 (0.002)
Bag of 400 labels
(blank, self-adhesive) 7 x 16 mm
–
–
LA1-DN
(2 contacts)
1
LA9-D91
0.001 (0.002)
Sealing cover (for time-delay
auxiliary contact block)
–
–
LA2, LA3-D
1
LA9-D901
0.005 (0.011)
35mm DIN rail (7.5mm deep x 2mm long)
D09 to D38
1
AM1-DP200
0.650 (1.440)
35mm DIN rail (15mm deep x 2mm long)
D09 to D38
1
AM1-ED200
1.310 (2.880)
75mm DIN rail (15mm deep x 2mm long)
D40 to D95
1
AM1-DL200
3.000 (6.600)
–
1
LA9-D973
0.025 (0.055)
Mounting accessories
Adaptor for mounting on ' rail
D09 to D38
Mounting plates for fixing on 2 '
rails (120 mm fixing centers)
D09 to D18
D09 to D18
–
10
DX1-AP25
0.065 (0.143)
D25 and D38
D25 and D38
–
10
DX1-AP26
0.082 (0.180)
Mounting plate
Replacement F115, F150 by D115.D150
1
LA9-D730
0.360 (0.792)
1
LA9-D511
0.020 (0.044)
D09 to D32
Set of shims for attacing side-mounting blocks LA8-DN on LC1-D40 to D95 contactors
52
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection
AC coils
For contactors LC1-D09, D12, D18, D2500
Control circuit
voltage Uc
Average
resistance
at 20 °C ± 10%
Inductance of
closed circuit
V
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Average
resistance
at 20 °C ± 10 %
Inductance of
closed circuit
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50 Hz: 60 VA, 60 Hz: 70 VA.
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50 Hz: 7 VA, 60 Hz: 7.5 VA.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.8 to 1.1 Uc.
50 Hz
LX1-D2kk
60 Hz
21 a
6.3
0.26
LX1-D2Z5
4.98
0.21
LX1-D2Z6
0.070 (0.154)
24
6.82
0.3
LX1-D2B5
5.45
0.25
LX1-D2B6
0.070 (0.154)
32
12.26
0.48
LX1-D2C5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
42
21.32
0.93
LX1-D2D5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
48
28.05
1.22
LX1-D2E5
22.09
1.02
LX1-D2E6
0.070 (0.154)
110
148.2
5.7
LX1-D2F5
116.6
4.5
LX1-D2F6
0.070 (0.154)
120
–
–
–
139.2
5.1
LX1-D2G6
0.070 (0.154)
127
192.5
7.5
LX1-D2G5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
208
–
–
–
417.8
16.6
LX1-D2L6
0.070 (0.154)
220
–
–
–
490.2
18.5
LX1-D2M6
0.070 (0.154)
220/230
613.3
23
LX1-D2M5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
230
649.7
25
LX1-D2P5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
240
726.6
25
LX1-D2U5
587.4
21
LX1-D2U6
0.070 (0.154)
256
816
31
LX1-D2W5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
277
–
–
–
781.5
30
LX1-D2W6
0.070 (0.154)
380
–
–
–
1486
55
LX1-D2Q6
0.070 (0.154)
380/400
1848
67
LX1-D2Q5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
400
2069
68
LX1-D2V5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
415
2219
78
LX1-D2N5
1826
69
LX1-D2N6
0.070 (0.154)
440
2549
82
LX1-D2R5
1892
71
LX1-D2R6
0.070 (0.154)
480
–
–
–
2304
85
LX1-D2T6
0.070 (0.154)
500
3285
107
LX1-D2S5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
575
–
–
–
3432
119
LX1-D2S6
0.070 (0.154)
600
–
–
–
3678
135
LX1-D2X6
0.070 (0.154)
660
5631
190
LX1-D2Y5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 70 VA to 50 Hz.
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 8 VA to 50 Hz.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc.
50/60 Hz
21 a
–
–
–
5.6
0.24
LX1-D2Z7
0.070 (0.154)
24
–
–
–
6.19
0.26
LX1-D2B7
0.070 (0.154)
42
–
–
–
19.15
0.77
LX1-D2D7
0.070 (0.154)
48
–
–
–
25
1
LX1-D2E7
0.070 (0.154)
110
–
–
–
130
5.5
LX1-D2F7
0.070 (0.154)
115
–
–
–
–
–
LX1-D2FE7
0.070 (0.154)
120
–
–
–
159
6.7
LX1-D2G7
0.070 (0.154)
220/230 q
–
–
–
539
22
LX1-D2M7
0.070 (0.154)
230
–
–
–
595
21
LX1-D2P7
0.070 (0.154)
230/240 f
–
–
–
645
25
LX1-D2U7
0.070 (0.154)
380/400
–
–
–
1580
60
LX1-D2Q7
0.070 (0.154)
400
–
–
–
1810
64
LX1-D2V7
0.070 (0.154)
415
–
–
–
1938
74
LX1-D2N7
0.070 (0.154)
440
–
–
–
2242
79
LX1-D2R7
0.070 (0.154)
c The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
a Voltage for special coils in contactors with LA4-DT or LA4-DR electronic serial timer modules, with 24 V supply.
q This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz.
f This coil can be used on 230/240 V at 50 Hz and at 240 V only at 60 Hz.
53
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection
AC coils
For contactors LC1-D25 (except LC1-D2500), D32, D38
Control circuit
voltage Uc
Average
resistance
at 20 °C ± 10%
Inductance of
closed circuit
V
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Average
resistance
at 20 °C ± 10 %
Inductance of
closed circuit
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50 Hz: 90 VA, 60 Hz: 100 VA.
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50 Hz: 7.5 VA, 60 Hz: 8.5 VA.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.8 to 1.1 Uc.
50 Hz
LX1-D4kk
60 Hz
21 a
3.5
0.23
LX1-D4Z5
2.9
0.14
LX1-D4Z6
0.070 (0.154)
24
4.5
0.25
LX1-D4B5
3.5
0.18
LX1-D4B6
0.070 (0.154)
32
8.6
0.45
LX1-D4C5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
42
14.4
0.78
LX1-D4D5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
48
18.6
1.1
LX1-D4E5
14.5
0.72
LX1-D4E6
0.070 (0.154)
110
105
5.4
LX1-D4F5
81
3.8
LX1-D4F6
0.070 (0.154)
120
–
–
–
98
4.5
LX1-D4G6
0.070 (0.154)
127
136
7.1
LX1-D4G5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
208
–
–
–
272
14
LX1-D4L6
0.070 (0.154)
220
–
–
–
325
15
LX1-D4M6
0.070 (0.154)
220/230
431
21
LX1-D4M5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
230
454
23
LX1-D4P5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
240
526
25
LX1-D4U5
405
18
LX1-D4U6
0.070 (0.154)
256
565
29
LX1-D4W5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
277
–
–
–
525
24
LX1-D4W6
0.070 (0.154)
380
–
–
–
1010
30
LX1-D4Q6
0.070 (0.154)
380/400
1306
64
LX1-D4Q5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
400
1389
73
LX1-D4V5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
415
1595
76
LX1-D4N5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
440
1710
85
LX1-D4R5
1315
61
LX1-D4R6
0.070 (0.154)
480
–
–
–
1605
72
LX1-D4T6
0.070 (0.154)
500
2168
110
LX1-D4S5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
575
–
–
–
2360
103
LX1-D4S6
0.070 (0.154)
600
–
–
–
2480
113
LX1-D4X6
0.070 (0.154)
660
3984
191
LX1-D4Y5
–
–
–
0.070 (0.154)
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 100 VA to 50 Hz.
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 8.5 VA to 50 Hz.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc.
50/60 Hz
21 a
–
–
–
3.1
0.18
LX1-D4Z7
0.085 (0.187)
24
–
–
–
4.3
0.23
LX1-D4B7
0.085 (0.187)
42
–
–
–
13.5
0.69
LX1-D4D7
0.085 (0.187)
48
–
–
–
16
0.92
LX1-D4E7
0.085 (0.187)
110
–
–
–
91
4.9
LX1-D4F7
0.085 (0.187)
115
–
–
–
–
–
LX1-D4FE7
0.085 (0.187)
0.085 (0.187)
120
–
–
–
107
5.5
LX1-D4G7
220/230 q
–
–
–
367
16
LX1-D4M7
0.085 (0.187)
230
–
–
–
377
21
LX1-D4P7
0.085 (0.187)
230/240 f
–
–
–
452
23
LX1-D4U7
0.085 (0.187)
380/400
–
–
–
1186
32
LX1-D4Q7
0.085 (0.187)
400
–
–
–
1200
65
LX1-D4V7
0.085 (0.187)
415
–
–
–
1383
70
LX1-D4N7
0.085 (0.187)
440
–
–
–
1478
78
LX1-D4R7
0.085 (0.187)
c The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
a Voltage for special coils in contactors with LA4-DT or LA4-DR electronic serial timer modules, with 24 V supply.
q This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz.
f This coil can be used on 230/240 V at 50 Hz and at 240 V only at 60 Hz.
54
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection
AC coils
For contactors LC1-D40, D50, D65, D80, D95
Control circuit
voltage Uc
Average
resistance
at 20 °C ± 10%
Inductance of
closed circuit
V
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Average
resistance
at 20 °C ± 10 %
Inductance of
closed circuit
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50 Hz: 200 VA, 60 Hz: 220 VA.
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50 Hz: 20 VA, 60 Hz: 22 VA.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc.
50 Hz
LX1-D6kk
60 Hz
24
1.4
0.09
LX1-D6B5
1.05
0.06
LX1-D6B6
32
2.6
0.16
LX1-D6C5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
0.280 (0.616)
42
4.4
0.27
LX1-D6D5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
0.280 (0.616)
48
5.5
0.35
LX1-D6E5
4.2
0.23
LX1-D6E6
110
31
1.9
LX1-D6F5
22
1.2
LX1-D6F6
0.280 (0.616)
120
–
–
–
28
1.5
LX1-D6G6
0.280 (0.616)
127
41
2.4
LX1-D6G5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
208
–
–
–
86
4.3
LX1-D6L6
0.280 (0.616)
0.280 (0.616)
220
–
–
–
98
4.8
LX1-D6M6
220/230
127
7.5
LX1-D6M5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
230
133
8.1
LX1-D6P5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
0.280 (0.616)
240
152
8.7
LX1-D6U5
120
5.7
LX1-D6U6
256
166
10
LX1-D6W5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
277
–
–
–
157
8
LX1-D6W6
0.280 (0.616)
380
–
–
–
300
14
LX1-D6Q6
0.280 (0.616)
380/400
381
22
LX1-D6Q5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
0.280 (0.616)
400
411
25
LX1-D6V5
–
–
–
415
463
26
LX1-D6N5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
440
513
30
LX1-D6R5
392
19
LX1-D6R6
0.280 (0.616)
0.280 (0.616)
480
–
–
–
480
23
LX1-D6T6
500
668
38
LX1-D6S5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
575
–
–
–
675
33
LX1-D6S6
0.280 (0.616)
600
–
–
–
775
36
LX1-D6X6
0.280 (0.616)
660
1220
67
LX1-D6Y5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50 /60 Hz: 245 VA to 50 Hz.
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 26 VA to 50 Hz.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc.
50/60 Hz
24
–
–
–
1.22
0.08
LX1-D6B7
0.280 (0.616)
42
–
–
–
3.5
0.25
LX1-D6D7
0.280 (0.616)
48
–
–
–
5
0.32
LX1-D6E7
0.280 (0.616)
110
–
–
–
26
1.7
LX1-D6F7
0.280 (0.616)
115
–
–
–
–
–
LX1-D6FE7
0.280 (0.616)
120
–
–
–
32
2
LX1-D6G7
0.280 (0.616)
220/230 a
–
–
–
102
6.7
LX1-D6M7
0.280 (0.616)
230
–
–
–
115
7.7
LX1-D6P7
0.280 (0.616)
230/240 q
–
–
–
131
8.3
LX1-D6U7
0.280 (0.616)
380/400 f
–
–
–
310
20
LX1-D6Q7
0.280 (0.616)
400
–
–
–
349
23
LX1-D6V7
0.280 (0.616)
415
–
–
–
390
24
LX1-D6N7
0.280 (0.616)
440
–
–
–
410
27
LX1-D6R7
0.280 (0.616)
c The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
a For use on 230 V 50 Hz, apply a multiplying factor of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 6 and 7.
This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz.
q This coil can be used on 230/240 V at 50 Hz and at 240 V only at 60 Hz.
f For use on 400 V 50 Hz, apply a multiplying factor of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 6 and 7.
55
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection
AC coils
For contactors LC1-D115
Control circuit
voltage Uc
Average
resistance
at 20 °C ± 10%
Inductance of
closed circuit
V
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Average
resistance
at 20 °C ± 10 %
Inductance of
closed circuit
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) -50 or 60 Hz: 300 VA.
- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) -50 or 60 Hz: 22 VA.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc.
50 Hz
LX1-D8kk
60 Hz
24
1.24
0.09
LX1-D8B5
0.87
0.07
LX1-D8B6
0.280 (0.616)
32
2.14
0.17
LX1-D8C5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
42
3.91
0.28
LX1-D8D5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
48
4.51
0.36
LX1-D8E5
3.91
0.28
LX1-D8E6
0.280 (0.616)
110
26.53
2.00
LX1-D8F5
19.97
1.45
LX1-D8F6
0.280 (0.616)
115
26.53
2.00
LX1-D8FE5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
120
–
–
–
24.02
1.70
LX1-D8G6
0.280 (0.616)
127
32.75
2.44
LX1-D8FC5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
208
–
–
–
67.92
5.06
LX1-D8L6
0.280 (0.616)
220
104.77
7.65
LX1-D8M5
79.61
5.69
LX1-D8M6
0.280 (0.616)
230
104.77
8.29
LX1-D8P5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
240
125.25
8.89
LX1-D8U5
97.04
6.75
LX1-D8U6
0.280 (0.616)
277
–
–
–
125.75
8.89
LX1-D8W6
0.280 (0.616)
380
338.51
22.26
LX1-D8Q5
243.07
17.04
LX1-D8Q6
0.280 (0.616)
400
368.43
25.55
LX1-D8V5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
415
368.43
27.65
LX1-D8N5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
440
441.56
30.34
LX1-D8R5
338.51
22.26
LX1-D8R6
0.280 (0.616)
480
–
–
–
368.43
25.55
LX1-D8T6
0.280 (0.616)
500
566.62
38.12
LX1-D8S5
–
–
–
0.280 (0.616)
For contactors LC1-D115, D150
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 °C:
- inrush: cos ϕ = 0.9 - 450 VA.
- sealed: cos ϕ = 0.9 - 6 VA.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.8 to 1.15 Uc.
Coils with built-in surge suppression device, class B
50/60 Hz
24
–
–
–
147
3.03
LX1-D8B7
0.300 (0.66)
32
–
–
–
301
8.28
LX1-D8C7
0.300 (0.66)
42
–
–
–
498
13.32
LX1-D8D7
0.300 (0.66)
48
–
–
–
1061
24.19
LX1-D8E7
0.300 (0.66)
110
–
–
–
4377
109.69
LX1-D8F7
0.300 (0.66)
115
–
–
–
4377
109.69
LX1-D8FE7
0.300 (0.66)
120
–
–
–
4377
109.69
LX1-D8G7
0.300 (0.66)
127
–
–
–
6586
152.65
LX1-D8FC7
0.300 (0.66)
208
–
–
–
10 895
260.15
LX1-D8L7
0.300 (0.66)
220
–
–
–
9895
210.72
LX1-D8M7
0.300 (0.66)
230
–
–
–
9895
210.72
LX1-D8P7
0.300 (0.66)
240
–
–
–
9895
210.72
LX1-D8U7
0.300 (0.66)
277
–
–
–
21 988
533.17
LX1-D8UE7
0.300 (0.66)
380
–
–
–
21 011
482.42
LX1-D8Q7
0.300 (0.66)
400
–
–
–
21 011
482.42
LX1-D8V7
0.300 (0.66)
415
–
–
–
21 011
482.42
LX1-D8N7
0.300 (0.66)
440
–
–
–
21 501
507.47
LX1-D8R7
0.300 (0.66)
480
–
–
–
32 249
938.41
LX1-D8T7
0.300 (0.66)
500
–
–
–
32 249
938.41
LX1-D8S7
0.300 (0.66)
c The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
56
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection
DC coils
For contactors LP1-D09, D12, D18
Control circuit voltage Uc
Average resistance
at 20 °C ± 10%
Inductance of closed circuit
V
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Average consumption: 9 W.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.8 to 1.1 Uc.
LX4-D2kk
12
17
0.79
LX4-D2JD
0.175 (0.385)
21 a
45.4
2.16
LX4-D2ZD
0.175 (0.385)
24
71
3.1
LX4-D2BD
0.175 (0.385)
36
149.7
7.1
LX4-D2CD
0.175 (0.385)
48
267
11.9
LX4-D2ED
0.175 (0.385)
60
422
19
LX4-D2ND
0.175 (0.385)
72
609
26
LX4-D2SD
0.175 (0.385)
110
1411
61.8
LX4-D2FD
0.175 (0.385)
125
1781
77.8
LX4-D2GD
0.175 (0.385)
220
5235
221
LX4-D2MD
0.175 (0.385)
250
6433
271
LX4-D2UD
0.175 (0.385)
440
19 785
793
LX4-D2RD
0.175 (0.385)
For contactors LP1-D25, D32
Specifications
Average consumption: 11 W.
Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.8 to 1.1 Uc.
LX4-D4kk
12
13.3
0.73
LX4-D4JD
0.265
21 a
36.4
2.11
LX4-D4ZD
0.265
24
53
2.92
LX4-D4BD
0.265
36
120.3
7.17
LX4-D4CD
0.265
48
211
11.3
LX4-D4ED
0.265
60
331
17.8
LX4-D4ND
0.265
72
473
27.5
LX4-D4SD
0.265
110
1122
63.6
LX4-D4FD
0.265
125
1431
81
LX4-D4GD
0.265
220
4461
237
LX4-D4MD
0.265
250
6044
338
LX4-D4UD
0.265
440
17 450
932
LX4-D4RD
0.265
c The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
a Voltage for special coils in contactors with LA4-DT or LA4-DR electronic serial timer modules, with 24 V supply.
57
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection
DC coils
For contactors LP1-D40, D50, D65
Control circuit voltage Uc
Average resistance
at 20 °C ± 10%
Inductance of closed circuit
V
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Average consumption: 22 W.
Operating range: 0.85 to 1.1 Uc.
LX4-D6kk
12
7.1
0.44
LX4-D6JD
0.415 (0.913)
24
26.8
1.69
LX4-D6BD
0.415 (0.913)
36
58
3.55
LX4-D6CD
0.415 (0.913)
48
109
6.86
LX4-D6ED
0.415 (0.913)
60
173
10.9
LX4-D6ND
0.415 (0.913)
72
234
14.7
LX4-D6SD
0.415 (0.913)
110
560
35.28
LX4-D6FD
0.415 (0.913)
125
717
45.2
LX4-D6GD
0.415 (0.913)
220
2255
142
LX4-D6MD
0.415 (0.913)
250
2940
185
LX4-D6UD
0.415 (0.913)
440
9080
572
LX4-D6RD
0.415 (0.913)
For contactors LP1-D80
Specifications
Average consumption: 22 W.
Operating range: 0.85 to 1.1 Uc.
LX4-D7kk
12
6.6
0.46
LX4-D7JD
0.680 (1.496)
24
27
1.89
LX4-D7BD
0.680 (1.496)
36
57
4
LX4-D7CD
0.680 (1.496)
48
107
7.5
LX4-D7ED
0.680 (1.496)
60
170
11.9
LX4-D7ND
0.680 (1.496)
72
230
16.1
LX4-D7SD
0.680 (1.496)
110
564
39.5
LX4-D7FD
0.680 (1.496)
125
718
50.3
LX4-D7GD
0.680 (1.496)
220
2215
155
LX4-D7MD
0.680 (1.496)
250
2850
200
LX4-D7UD
0.680 (1.496)
440
9195
640
LX4-D7RD
0.680 (1.496)
c The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
58
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection
DC coils
For contactors LC1-D115, D150
Control circuit voltage Uc
Average resistance
at 20 °C ± 10 %
Inductance of closed circuit
V
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Average consumption: 6 W.
Operating range: 0.7 to 1.2 Uc.
Coils with built-in surge suppression, class B.
24
147
3.03
LX4-D8BD
0.300 (0.66)
48
1061
24.19
LX4-D8ED
0.300 (0.66)
60
1673
38.44
LX4-D8ND
0.300 (0.66)
72
2500
56.27
LX4-D8SD
0.300 (0.66)
110
4377
109.69
LX4-D8FD
0.300 (0.66)
125
6586
152.65
LX4-D8GD
0.300 (0.66)
220
9895
210.72
LX4-D8MD
0.300 (0.66)
250
18 022
345.40
LX4-D8UD
0.300 (0.66)
440
21 501
684.66
LX4-D8RD
0.300 (0.66)
c The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
LX4-D8kk
59
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection
Wide range DC coils (for greater voltage operating range)
For contactors LP1-D09, D12, D18
Control circuit voltage Uc
Average resistance
at 20 °C ± 10 %
Inductance of closed circuit
V
Ω
H
Catalog
number c
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Average consumption: 11 W.
Operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 Uc.
Coils with “TH” treatment as standard.
LX4-D2kk
12
15.6
0.71
LX4-D2JW f
0.175 (0.385)
24
58.7
2.49
LX4-D2BW f
0.175 (0.385)
36
122.6
5.3
LX4-D2CW f
0.175 (0.385)
48
234
9.9
LX4-D2EW f
0.175 (0.385)
72
530
21.4
LX4-D2SW f
0.175 (0.385)
110
1105
44.4
LX4-D2FW f
0.175 (0.385)
220
4593
185
LX4-D2MW f
0.175 (0.385)
For contactors LP1-D25, D32
Specifications
Average consumption: 13 W.
Operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 Uc.
Coils with “TH” treatment as standard.
LX4-D4kk
12
12.3
0.68
LX4-D4JW f
0.265 (0.583)
24
49.2
2.71
LX4-D4BW f
0.265 (0.583)
36
100.7
5.57
LX4-D4CW f
0.265 (0.583)
48
199
10.8
LX4-D4EW f
0.265 (0.583)
72
404
22.3
LX4-D4SW f
0.265 (0.583)
110
944
51
LX4-D4FW f
0.265 (0.583)
220
3953
208
LX4-D4MW f
0.265 (0.583)
For contactors LP1-D40, D50 , D65
Specifications
Average consumption: 22 W.
Operating range: 0.75 to 1.2
Uc.
Coils with “TH” treatment as
standard.
LX4-D6kk
12
6.8
0.45
LX4-D6JW f
0.415 (0.913)
24
30
1.9
LX4-D6BW f
0.415 (0.913)
36
53
3.5
LX4-D6CW f
0.415 (0.913)
48
110
7.2
LX4-D6EW f
0.415 (0.913)
72
215
14.2
LX4-D6SW f
0.415 (0.913)
110
580
38.3
LX4-D6FW f
0.415 (0.913)
220
2120
140
LX4-D6MW f
0.415 (0.913)
For contactors LP1-D80
Specifications
Average consumption: 23 W.
Operating range: 0.75 to 1.2 Uc.
Coils with “TH” treatment as standard.
12
6.2
0.49
LX4-D7JW f
0.680 (1.496)
24
23.5
1.75
LX4-D7BW f
0.680 (1.496)
36
51.9
4.18
LX4-D7CW f
0.680 (1.496)
48
94.2
7
LX4-D7EW f
0.680 (1.496)
72
204
15.7
LX4-D7SW f
0.680 (1.496)
110
483
36
LX4-D7FW f
0.680 (1.496)
220
1922
144
LX4-D7MW f
0.680 (1.496)
c The last 2 digits of the reference represent the voltage code.
f Wide range coils cannot be used on contactors utilizing both front and side mounted auxiliary contact blocks.
60
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions – Contactors, types LC1-D
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LC1-D2510, D2501, D2504
LC1-D32
c
12,5
(LA8)
c1(LA1)
45
12,5
(LA8)
84
87(Di1)
LA4
c
10
12,5
(LA8)
c1(LA1)
c2(LA6-DK10)
56
107(3)(DF,DT)
=
(DM,DR,DW,DL)
Minimum
electrical clearance
105(3) (DM,DR,DW,DL)
10
90(Di2)
74
77(Di1)
LA4
97(3)(DF,DT)
Minimum
electrical clearance
44
115(3)
=
44
100(Di2)
LC1-D09, D12
LC1-D18, LC1-D2500
12,5
(LA8)
c2(LA6-DK10)
c3(LA2,LA3)
c3(LA2,LA3)
LC1-
c
c1 c
c2
c3 a
LC1-
c
c1 c
c2
c3 a
D09, D12
80
113
125
133
D2510, D2501,
D2504
93
127
138
146
D18, D2500
85
118
130
138
D32
99
132
144
152
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts.
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts; 1 contact = 120 (D25) and 125 (D32) (LA1-DN10 or DN01)
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover.
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover.
(3) With or without combined use of a coil suppressor module (LA4-DA1, DB1, DE1).
(3) With or without combined use of a coil suppressor module (LA4-DA1, DB1, DE1).
LC1-D40, D50, D65
LC1-D80, D95
114(4)
12,5
(LA8)
146(1)(LA1)
157(LA6-DK10)
(3)
12
12,5
(LA8)
125(4)
153(1)(LA1)
165(LA6-DK20)
165(2)(LA2,LA3)
12,5
(LA8)
(3)
142(DF,DT)
LA4
150(DM,DR,DW,DL)
44
135(Di2, Di3)
142(DF,DT)
135(Di2, Di3)
LA4
127
12
32
Minimum
electrical clearance
127
Minimum
electrical clearance
44
150(DM,DR,DW,DL)
28
12,5
(LA8)
173(2)(LA2,LA3)
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts; 1 contact = 139 (LA1-DN10 or DN01)
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts; 1 contact = 147 (LA1-DN10 or DN01)
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover.
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover.
(3) 75: 3-pole, 85: 4-pole.
(3) 85: 3-pole, 96: 4-pole.
(4) 125: LC1-Dkk008.
(4) 140: LC1-Dkk008.
LC1-D115, D150
168(2)(LA2,LA3)
c
185(DF,DT)
158
LA8
188(DM,DR,DW,DL)
174(Di2, Di3)
LA4
a
150(1)(LA1)
155(LA6-DK20)
LC1-
c
D11500, D15000
132
a
120
D115004
132
155
D115006,
D150006
115
120
D1150046
115
155
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts.
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover.
61
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions – Contactors, types LC1-D
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LP1-D25, D32
10
c
12,5
(LA8)
c1(LA1)
45
=
84
87(Di1)
LA4
12,5
(LA8)
10
c
12,5
(LA8)
c1 (LA1)
c2(LA6-DK10)
56
12,5
(LA8)
c2(LA6-DK10)
c3(LA2,LA3)
c3(LA2,LA3)
LP1-
c
c1 c
c2
c3 a
LP1-
c
c1 c
c2
c3 a
D09, D12
116
148
160
168
D25
130
163
174
183
D18
121
154
165
173
D32
135
168
179
187
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts; 1 contact: 157 (D25), 162 (D32) (LA1-DN10 or DN01)
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover
(3) With or without combined use of a coil suppressor module (LA4-DB1, DC1, DE1).
(3) With or without combined use of a coil suppressor module (LA4-DB1, DC1, DE1).
LP1-D40, D50, D65
LP1-D80
Minimum
electrical clearance LA4-Di3
12
171(4)
127
127
Minimum
electrical clearance LA4-Di3
(3)
12
181(4)
202(1)LA1)
(3)
210(1)(LA1)
213(LA6-DK10)
221(LA6-DK20)
221(2)(LA2,LA3)
229(2)(LA2,LA3)
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts; 1 contact: 196 (LA1-DN10 or DN01)
(1) With 2 or 4 contacts; 1 contact: 204 (LA1-DN10 or DN01)
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover
(2) + 4 mm with sealing cover
(3) 75: 3-pole, 85: 4-pole
(3) 85: 3-pole, 96: 4-pole
(4) 182: LP1-Dkk008
(4) 196: LP1-Dkk008
62
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
107(3)(DF,DT)
Minimum
electrical clearance
105(3)(DM,DL)
90(Di2)
74
77(Di1)
LA4
97(3)(DF,DT)
Minimum
electrical clearance
44
115(3)(DM ,DL)
=
44
100(Di2)
LP1-D09, D12, D18
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Mounting – Contactors, types LC1-D and LP1-D
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LC1-D40 to D95, LP1-D40 to D80
On mounting rail AM1-DL200 or DL201 (width 75 mm)
For LC1 on mounting rail AM1-EDkkk or AM1-DE200 (width 35 mm)
=
=
b
127
=
=
LC1-D09 to D38, LP1-D09 to D32
On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 (width 35mm)
c
c
LC1-
D09
D12
D18
D25
D32
D38
LC1-
D40
D50
D65
D80
D95
b
74
74
74
84
84
84
c (AM1-DL200)
131
131
131
142
142
c (AM1-DP200)
82
82
87
95
100
100
c (AM1-DL201)
121
121
11
132
132
c (AM1-DE200)
90
90
95
103
108
108
c (AM1-EDkkk or DE200)
121
121
121
132
132
LP1-
D09
D12
D18
D25
D32
LP1-
D40
D50
D65
D80
c (AM1-DP200)
117
117
122
132
137
c (AM1-DL200)
188
188
188
198
c (AM1-DE200)
125
125
130
140
145
c (AM1-DL201)
178
178
178
198
158
=
100
=
LC1-D115, D150
On mounting rail AM1-DP200 or AM1-DE200 (width 35mm)
c
D11500
6
D15000
D15000
6
c (AM1-DP200 or DR200)
134.5
117.5
134.5
117.5
c (AM1-DEkkk or EDkkk)
142.5
125.5
142.5
125.5
LC1-D09 to D38, LP1-D09 to D32
On 1 mounting rail DZ5-MB and clip-on mounting plate LA9-D973
LC1-D40 to D95, LP1-D40 to D80
On 2 mounting rails DZ5-MB on 120 mm centers
D09 to D18
D25, D32
21
=
35
44
=
50
=
5
c
40
49
=
5
50
5
LA9-D973
5
LA9-D973
DZ5-ME5
110
D11500
120
LC1-
c
15
40
LC1-
D09
D12
D18
D25
D32
D38
LC1-
D40
D50
D65
D80
D95
c
80
80
85
93
98
98
c
114
114
114
125
125
LP1-
D09
D12
D18
D25
D32
LP1-
D40
D50
D65
D80
c
115
115
120
130
135
c
171
171
171
181
63
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Mounting – Contactors, types LC1-D and LP1-D
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LC1-D09 to D38, LP1-D09 to D32
On 2 mounting rails DZ5-MB on 120 mm centres
On 2 mounting rails DZ5-MB on 60 mm centres
DZ5-ME5
DZ5-ME8
c
c
27
50
60
110
120
(1)
15
G
a
LC1D09
D12
D18
D25
a
45
45
45
57
c
80
80
85
93
LP1D09
D12
D18
D25
a
45
45
57
57
c
115
115
120
130
(1) DX1-AP25 (Lk1-D09 to D18), DX1-AP26 (Lk1-D25 and D32)
LC1-D09 to D38, LP1-D09 to D32
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA, PB, PC
D32
57
98
D32
57
135
D38
57
98
LC1c
G
LP1c
G
D09
80
35
D09
115
35
D12
80
35
D12
115
35
D18
85
35
D18
120
35
D25
93
44
D25
130
40 or 50
D32
98
44
D32
135
40 or 50
D38
98
44
LC1-D40 to D95, LP1-D40 to D80
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1-PA, PB, PC
50
110
AF1-EA4
c
G
c
LC1D09
D12
c
80
80
G
35
35
LP1D09
D12
c
115
115
G
35
35
LC1-D09 to D38, LP1-D09 to D18
Panel mounted with #8 screws
D18
85
35
D18
120
35
D25
93
44
D25
130
40 or 50
2xM4
D32
D38
98
98
44
44
D32
135
40 or 50
LP1-D25 and D32
Panel mounted with #8
screws
40
AF1-EA6
LC1c
D40
114
D50
114
D65
114
D80
125
LP1c
D40
171
D50
171
D65
171
D80
181
D95
125
LC1-D40 to D95, LP1-D40 to D80
Panel mounted with 1/4” screws
3xØ6.5mm
=
50
100/110
=
=
2xØ4.5mm
c
G
=
=
G
=
=
=
c
D18
85
35
D18
120
35
D25
93
44
D25
130
50
D32
98
44
D32
135
50
D38
98
44
=
40
=
LC1c
D40
114
D50
114
D65
114
D80
125
LP1c
D40
171
D50
171
D65
171
D80
181
LC1c
G (3-poles)
G (4-poles)
D11500
132
96/110
130/144
D115006
115
96/110
130/144
D15000
132
96/110
–
D150006
115
96/110
–
D95
125
=
c
=
G
=
158
130
=
LC1D09
D12
c
80
80
G
35
35
LP1D09
D12
c
115
115
G
35
35
LC1-D115, D150
Panel mounted with 1/4” screws
64
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions, mounting – Reversing contactors types LC2-D and LP2-D
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LP2-D09 to D32
2 x LP1-D09 to D32
Panel mounted with #8 screws
e1
e1
LC2-D09 to D38
2 x LC1-D09 to D38
Panel mounted with #8 screws
2xØ4.5mm
50/60
b
G
=
c
=
e2
=
e2
c
=
=
b
50/60
=
=
2xØ4.5mm
G
a
=
a
LC2- or 2 x LC1-
a
b
c
e1 (3 P)
e2 (4 P)
G
LP2- or 2 x LP1-
a
b
c
e1 (3 P)
e2 (4 P)
G
D09, D12
105
74
84
7
6
95
D09, D12
105
74
119
7
6
95
D18
106
74
92
8
–
95
D18
106
74
127
8
–
95
D25
127
84
99
8
7
111
D25
127
84
136
8
7
111
D32, D38
127
84
117
10
–
111
D32
127
84
154
10
–
111
LC2-D40 to D65
2 x LC1-D40 to D65
Panel mounted with 1/4” screws
2 x LP1-D40 to D65
Panel mounted with 1/4” screws
6xØ6.5mm
G1
=
6xØ6.5mm
G1
=
=
100/110
b
40
G
40
=
c
=
e2
=
e2
c
13
13
b
100/110
8
8
=
e1
c, e1 and e2 including cabling
e1
c, e1 and e2 including cabling
40
a
G
40
=
a
LC2- or 2 x LC1- (3-pole)
a
b
c
e1
G
G1
2 x LP1- (3-pole)
a
b
c
e1
G
G1
D40, D50, D65
165
127
142
5
50
90
D40, D50, D65
165
127
199
5
50
90
LC2- or 2 x LC1- (4-pole)
a
b
c
e2
G
G1
2 x LP1- (4-pole)
a
b
c
e2
G
G1
D40, D65
182
127
133
11
57
97
D40, D65
182
127
190
11
57
97
2 x LP1-D80
Panel mounted with 1/4” screws
6xØ6.5mm
G1
6xØ6.5mm
G1
=
=
8
=
100/110
13
b
13
b
100/110
8
=
e1
c, e1 and e2 including cabling
LC2-D80 and D95
2 x LC1-D80 and D95
Panel mounted with 1/4” screws
e1
c, e1 and e2 including cabling
40
G
40
c
=
e2
=
e2
c
=
40
G
40
=
a
a
LC2- or 2 x LC1- (3-pole)
a
b
c
e1
G
G1
2 x LP1- (3-pole)
a
b
c
e1
G
G1
D80, D95
182
127
158
13
57
96
D80
182
127
215
13
57
96
LC2- or 2 x LC1- (4-pole)
a
b
c
e2
G
G1
2 x LP1- (4-pole)
a
b
c
e2
G
G1
D80
207
127
158
20
71
111
D80
207
127
215
20
71
111
c, e1 and e2 including cabling
c, e1 and e2 including cabling
c Dimensions with auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 61 and 62.
65
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions, mounting – Reversing contactors types LC2-D and LP2-D
LC2-D115 and D150
2 x LC1-D115 and D150
Panel mounted with 1/4” screws
=
130
158
=
e1
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
G
e2
=
c
=
a
LC2- or 2 x LC1- (3-pole)
a
c
e1
e2
G
D115, D150
266
148
56
18
242/256
LC2- or 2 x LC1- (4-pole)
a
c
e1
e2
G
D115
334
148
-
60
310/324
c, e1 and e2 including cabling
66
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Schemes – Contactors, types LC1-D and LP1-D
3-pole contactors
21/NC
22
5/L3
13/NO
T3/6
14
3/L2
A2
T2/4
R3
R4
1/L1
3
4
A1
5/L3
T3/6
1
2
T1/2
3/L2
T2/4
22
1/L1
T1/2
A2
A1
R1
21/NC
LC1 and LP1D4011 to D9511
R2
5/L3
T3/6
14
3/L2
13/NO
1/L1
T2/4
LC1-D0901 to D3801
LP1-D0901 to D3201
T1/2
5/L3
T3/6
A1
3/L2
A2
1/L1
T2/4
LC1-D0910 to D3810
LP1-D0910 to D3210
T1/2
A2
A1
LC1-D0900 to D3200
LC1-D11500 and D15000
4-pole contactors
R3
3
R4
4
A1
R1
R2
A2
1
7/L4
T4/8
A1
5/L3
T3/6
LC1 and LP1D40008 to D80008
2
3/L2
T2/4
A2
1/L1
A2
LC1 and LP1D12008 to D25008
T1/2
A1
LC1 and LP1D12004 to D80004
LC1-D115004
Front-mounting contact blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
63/NO
64
53/NO
54
83/NO
81/NC
82
84
71/NC
72
73/NO
61/NC
62
74
53/NO
54
63/NO
83/NO
84
83/NO
84
73/NO
74
54
61/NC
53/NO
87/NO
75/NC
76
3 N.O. + 1 N.C. LA1-DN31
88
61/NC
81/NC
82
62
71/NC
72
53/NO
61/NC
62
54
51/NC
64
71/NC
72
53/NO
61/NC
62
54
53/NO
4 N.O. LA1-DN40
54
1 N.O. + 3 N.C. LA1-DN13
62
61/NC
62
42
(91)
2 N.O. LA1-DN20
2 N.O. + 2 N.C. including 1 N.O. + 1 N.C. make before break LA1-DC22
52
4 N.C. LA1-DN04
53/NO
(94)
44
(93)
51/NC
61/NC
52
2 N.O. + 2 N.C. LA1-DN22
62
2 N.C. LA1-DN02
54
1 N.O. + 1 N.C. LA1-DN11
41/NC
(92)
1 N.C. LA1-DN01 c
43 NO
43/NO
1 N.O. LA1-DN10 c
Front-mounting contact blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012
43/NC
44
33/NO
21/NC
22
41/NC
42
34
31/NC
32
13/NO
21/NC
22
14
13/NO
34
14
21/NC
33/NO
22
21/NC
33/NO
43/NO
53/NO
21/NC
31/NC
43/NO
53/NO
22
34
44
54
22
32
44
54
64
53/NO
63/NO
41/NC
53/NO
54
54
41/NC
42
31/NC
32
42
2 N.O. + 2 N.C. LA1-DN22M
31/NC
43/NO
44
3 N.O. + 1 N.C. LA1-DN31M
3 N.O. + 1 N.C. LA1-DN31P
21/NC
31/NC
32
1 N.O. + 3 N.C. LA1-DN13M
1 N.O. + 3 N.C. LA1-DN13P
22
43/NO
21/NC
22
1 N.O. + 1 N.C. LA1-DN11M
32
31/NC
32
21/NC
22
13/NO
2 N.O. + 2 N.C. LA1-DN22G
14
2 N.O. + 2 N.C. LA1-DN22P
1 N.O. + 1 N.C. LA1-DN11G
44
13/NO
14
1 N.O. + 1 N.C. LA1-DN11P
c Single pole auxiliary contact blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.
67
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Schemes – Contactors, types LC1-D and LP1-D
Front-mounting contact blocks
Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts
83/NO
61/NC
73/NO
62
74
84
53/NO
54
83/NO
73/NO
74
2 N.O. protected (24-50 V)
+ 1 N.O. + 1 N.C. normal
LA1-DZ31
84
53/NO
63/NO
64
63/NO
64
2 N.O. protected (24-50 V)
2 N.O. standard
LA1-DZ40
54
53/NO
63/NO
64
54
53/NO
2 N.O. (5-24 V)
LA1-DY20
Includes 4 grounding terminal points
54
2 N.O. (24-50 V)
LA1-DX20
Front-mounting contact blocks
Time delay auxiliary contacts
55/NC
67/NO
56
65/NC
66
On-delay N.C. with 1N.O. break before make
LA2-DSk
68
57/NO
67/NO
68
58
55/NC
Off-delay 1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
LA3-DRk
56
On-delay 1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
LA2-DTk
E2
A2
A1
E1
Mechanical latch blocks
LA6-DK10 and LA6-DK20
Side-mounting contact blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
153/NO
(184)
163/NO
(174)
164
(173)
Electronic serial timer modules
B1
A2
A1
A2
c
a
K
A2
A1
K
(1)
t
0
A2
A1
A2
LA4-DMk
c
t
0
A2
A1
c
a
A1
Auto-Man-Stop control modules
Off-delay LA4-DRkU
B2
On-delay LA4-DTkU
A1
161/NC
(172)
162
(171)
154
(183)
(184)
2 N.O. LA8-DN20
154
(183)
153/NO
1 N.O. + 1 N.C. LA8-DN11
K
c Programmable controller
Interface modules
Relay interface
K
A2 c
A2
E2 –
A1 c
A1
E1 +
A2 c
K
Solid state
LA4-DWBk
A2
E2 –
A1 c
A1
E1 +
A2 c
K
A2
A1 c
A1
E2 –
A2 c
A2
E2 –
E1 +
A1 c
A1
K
Relay interface with manual override switch
LA4-DLk
E1 +
LA4-DFBQ
Relay interface
LA4-DFk
Relay interface
68
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
L2
L3
3
5
4
6
L1
1
3
5
A1 01
2
4
6
A2
U
V
W
A1
02
A2
21/NC
6
W
22
3
5
4
V
02
1
7
8
N
A1 01
2N
5
6
L3
2
2/L3
3
4
L2
A2
2/L2
1
2
L1
A1
1N
7
8
A2
1/L3
5
6
2/L1
1/L2
3
4
A2
A1
1/L1
LC2-D115 and D150
1
Reversing contactors, horizontally mounted
LC2-D, LP2-D
2
Changeover contactors, horizontally mounted
14
1
2
U
13/NO
21/NC
22
L3
6
14
L2
3
5
4
L1
1
A1
2
A2
A1
A2
6
W
21/NC
3
5
4
V
22
1
2
U
L3
21/NC
5
6
22
L2
L1
3
A1
A2
1
LC2-D40 to D95
4
Reversing contactors, horizontally mounted
LC2-D09 to D38, LP2-D09 to D32
2
Reversing contactors, horizontally mounted
13/NO
Schemes – Contactors, types LC2-D and LP2-D
– KM2
– KM1
A1
A1
– KM2
02
01
A1
02
01
A1
– KM1
01
A2
LA9-Dkkk78
A1
LA9-Dkkk02
A2
Electrical interlocking of contactors with
mechanical interlock without integrated electrical contacts
A1
Electrical interlocking of contactors with
mechanical interlock with integrated electrical contacts
01
– KM2
Coil
– KM2
A2
– KM1
A2
– KM2
A2
– KM1
A2
A2
02
02
A2
– KM1
Coil
69
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Scheme, setting-up, 3-pole bimetallic overload relays LR2 or LR3-D
Scheme
LR2-D
LR3-D
95
97
3
5
4
6
98
1
2
{ Man.
96
Auto
Reset
Setting-up the special functions of LR2-D and LR3-D thermal overload relays
Setting the relay
“Manual-Automatic” selection 4
7
2
5,5
6
A
1
LR2 D 13
8
A
U
T
O
M
7
6
TEST
STOP
4
NO
T
T
RESE
RESE
RESET
3
98
A
U
T
O
A
U
T
O
5
NC
97
95
96
“Manual” reset
“Automatic” reset
k Lift the transparent cover 1 to gain access to the settings and controls.
k Adjustment is achieved by turning dial 2 which is graduated directly in amperes.
k The setting can be locked by sealing 3 of the cover.
k After having lifted the transparent cover, the type of reset operation can be selected by turning
the blue “RESET” selector 4:
- turn to the left for manual reset,
- push and turn to the right for automatic reset.
The selector is then held in the automatic position and is released by turning the selector to the
left (return to manual operation).
k With the cover folded down, the selector is locked.
k Manual resetting of the relay is achieved by pressing the blue “RESET” button.
“Stop” function 5
“Test” function 6
A
U
T
O
A
U
T
O
ET
STOP
Stop
TEST
T
RESE
Locking
k The “Stop” function is obtained by pressing the red “STOP” button 5.
k Pressing the “STOP” button:
-actuates the N.C. contact,
- does not affect the N.O. contact.
k The “STOP” button can be locked by fitting a “U” clip (ref. LA7-D901).
With the cover folded down, the device is locked.
Test
Trip indicator
k The “Test” function is obtained by pressing the red “TEST” button 6 with a screwdriver.
k Operation of the “TEST” button simulates tripping of the relay and:
- actuates both N.O. and N.C. contacts,
- actuates the trip indicator 7.
70
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics – 3-pole bi-metallic overload relays LR2 or LR3-D
Application
LR2 and LR3-D 3-pole bimetallic overload relays are designed to protect a.c. circuits and motors against overloads, phase failure, long starting times and prolonged stalling of the motor.
Environment
Conforming to standards
Meets the essential requirements of the LV & EMC directives
Approvals
E164353
CCN NKCR
IEC 947-1, IEC 947-4,
NF C 63-650, VDE 0660, BS 4941
LR 2D1, D2, D3: ASE, CSA, UL, DEMKO, NEMKO, FI, SEMKO, Sichere
Trennung, PTB.
LR43364
Class 3211 03
LR2-D4: UL, CSA
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Protective treatment
Standard version
Protection against direct finger contact
“TH”
Ambient air temperature around
the device
Storage
- 60 to + 70°C (-76 to +158°F)
Normal operation without derating (IEC 947-4)
- 30 to + 55°C (-22 to +131°F)
Operational limits (with derating)
- 40 to + 70°C (-40 to +158°F)
Direct mounting
Beneath the contactor
LC1-D, LP1-D
Operating positions
without derating
In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
90°
180°
90°
90°
90°
180°
Auxiliary contact characteristics
Rated thermal current
Maximum sealed consumption for operating
coils of controlled contactors
(Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96)
Short-circuit protection
A
5
V
24
48
110
220
380
VA
100
200
400
600
600
600
V
24
48
110
220
440
–
W
100
100
50
45
25
–
600
AC supply
DC supply
By circuit breaker
Select in accordance with NEC and local codes
By fuses
Maximum 400% of motor FLA
Min./max. c.s.a.
Flexible cable without cable end
1 or 2 conductors
mm2
1/2.5
Flexible cable with cable end
1 or 2 conductors
mm2
1/2.5
Solid cable without cable end
1 or 2 conductors
mm2
Cabling
Tightening torque
Minimum 1 x 18 AWG
Maximum 2 x 14 AWG
1/2.5
1.2 Nkm (10 lb.-in.)
71
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics – 3-pole bi-metallic overload relays LR2 or LR3-D
Electrical characteristics of power circuit
Type
LR2-D1
LR3-D1
LR2-D2
LR3-D2
LR2-D3
LR3-D3
LR2-D4
Conforming to IEC 947-4
V
690
690
1000
1000
Conforming to UL, CSA
V
600
600
600
600
kV
6
6
6
6
Hz
0 to 400
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated impulse withstand
voltage (Uimp)
Frequency limits
Of the operational current
Tripping class
Conforming to UL 508, IEC 947-4
Setting range
Depending on model
A
0.1 to 25
23 to 40
17 to 104
80 to 140
Cabling
Stranded cable without cable end
1 or 2 conductors
AWG
mm2
14-8
1.5/10
14-8
1.5/10
10-0
4/35
10-4
4/50
Stranded cable with cable end
1 or 2 conductors
AWG
mm2
8
1/4
8
1/6
2
4/35
10-4
4/35
Solid cable without cable end
1 or 2 conductors
AWG
mm2
18-8
1/6
14-8
1.5/10
10-8
4/35
10-0
4/50
1.85 N•m
(15 lb.-in.)
2.5 Nkm
(15 lb.-in.)
9 Nkm
(45 lb.-in.)
9 Nkm
(45 lb.-in.)
10 or 20
Tightening torque
0 to 400
10
10 or 20
0 to 400
10
0 to 400
10 or 20
10
10
Operating characteristics
Selected by a switch, which can be locked and sealed, on the front face of the
relay
Reset
Manual or automatic
Indication
On front face of relay
Relay trip indicator
Stop function
Relay can be locked in Stop position
Operating the Stop button:
- actuates the N.C. contact,
- does not affect the N.O. contact.
Test function
Accessed by pressing the Test button with a screwdriver
Operating the Test button allows:
- checking of control wiring,
- simulation of relay ripping (actuates both N.C. and N.O. contacts).
Tripping curves
LR2-D
Average operating times
depending on multiples of the
current setting
Time
Class 10
Time
2
2
1
40
1
40
20
20
10
10
4
4
2
2
1
40
1
40
20
20
10
10
4
4
1
2
3
2
1
0,8
0,8 1
2
4
6
10
Class 20
1
2
3
2
1
0,8
17 20
0,8 1
2
4
6
10
17 20
1 Balanced operation, 3-phase, from cold state.
2 Balanced operation, 2-phase, from cold state.
3 Balanced operation, 3-phase, after a long period at the set current (hot state).
72
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
3-pole Solid-state Overload Relays LR9-D
Scheme, setting-up
Scheme
L1
L2
L3
1
3
5
LR9-D
2
4
6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
– KM1
(4)
(3)
≥ 112 %
(2)
Test
95
97
98
96
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
Stop
Reset man.
13
–A
(1) Tripped
– KM
A1
–M
14
M
3
(2) Overload
(1)
(3) Setting current
A2
– KM
N
(4) Specialized circuit
Setting up the special functions of the LR9-D solid state overload relay
Setting the relay
2
6
5
4
3
LR9 D 5369
Ir(A)
107
1
7
127
90
150
protection électronique moteur
ELECTRONIC MOTOR PROTECTION
98
NO
97
95
NC
96
• Lift the transparent cover (7) to gain access tot he various settings and controls.
• Adjustment is achieved by turning dial (1) which is graduated directly in amperes.
• The setting can be locked by sealing cover (7).
Stop function (3)
Test function (2)
Stop
Test
Trip indicator
• The Stop function is obtained by pressing the red STOP button (3).
• The TEST function is obtained by pressing the red TEST button (2) with a screwdriver.
• Pressing the STOP button:
- actuates the N/C contact,
- does not affect the N/O contact.
• Operation of the TEST button simulates tripping of the relay and:
- actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts,
- actuates the trip indicator (5).
• The STOP button can be locked by fitting a “U” clip (reference LA7-D901).
73
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
3-pole Solid-state Overload Relays LR9-D
Environment
Meets the essential requirements
of the LV & EMC directives
Conforming to standards
LR43364
Class 3211 03
E164353
CCN NKCR
Product vertifications
IEC 947-4, 255-8, 255-17 and VDE 0660
UL 508, CSA 22-2, PTB pending
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
IP 2X
Protective treatment
Standard version
“TH”
Ambient air temperature around the
device (conforming to IEC 255-8)
Storage
°C
- 40 to +85°C (-40 to +185°F)
Normal operation
°C
- 20 to + 55°C (-4 to +131°F)
Maximum operating altitude
Without derating
2000 m (6500 ft.)
Operating positions
without derating
In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Any position
Shock resistance
Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 68-2-7
15 g - 11 ms
Vibration resistance
Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 68-2-6
Dialectric strength 50 Hz
Conforming to IEC 255-5
kV
6
6g
Impulse withstand voltage
Conforming to IEC 255-5
kV
6
Resistance to electrostatic discharges
Conforming to IEC 255-5
kV
8
Resistance to radio-frequency
conducted disturbances
Conforming to IEC 255-5
V/m
10
Resistance to fast transient currents
Conforming to IEC 255-5
kV
2
Electromagnetic compatibility
Draft EN50081-1 and 2, EN50082-2
Meets requirements
Auxiliary contact characteristics
Rated thermal current
Maximum sealed consumption for operating
coils of controlled contactors
(Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96)
Short-circuit protection
A
5
V
24
48
110
220
380
VA
100
200
400
600
600
600
V
24
48
110
220
440
–
W
100
100
50
45
25
–
600
AC supply
DC supply
By circuit breaker
Select in accordance with NEC and local codes
By fuses
Maximum 400% of motor FLA
Min./max. c.s.a.
Flexible cable without cable end
1 or 2 conductors
mm2
1/2.5
Flexible cable with cable end
1 or 2 conductors
mm2
1/2.5
Solid cable without cable end
1 or 2 conductors
mm2
Cabling
Tightening torque
Minimum 1 x 18 AWG
Maximum 2 x 14 AWG
1/2.5
1.2 Nkm (10 lb.-in.)
74
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
3-pole Solid-state Overload Relays LR9-D
Electrical characteristics of power circuit
Type
LR9-D5369, LR9-D5569
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC 947-4
V
Rated insulation voltage (Ue)
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C
V
1000
kV
8
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
Frequency limits
Of the operational current
Tripping class
Conforming to UL 508, IEC 947-4
1000
Hz
50/60 c
10, 10A or 20
Setting range
A
90 to 150
Using DZ2FG lug
AWG
6 to 3/0
Using LA9F103 terminal
AWG
6 to 300 mcm
Cabling
Using DZ2FG lug
22.5 Nkm (200 lb-in.)
Using LA9F103 terminal
11 Nkm (100 lb-in.) with 4mm (5/32 in) Hex key
Tightening torque
Operating characteristics
Temperature compensation
- 20 to + 70°C (-4 to +158°F)
Reset
Manual on front face of relay
Fault indication
On front face of relay
Stop function
Actuation of the N/C contact without affecting the N/O contact
Test function
On front face of relay
Tripping thresholds
Conforming to IEC 947-4-1
Sensitivity to phase failure
Conforming to IEC 947-4-1
A
1.12 ± 6% of In
Tripping in 4 s ± 20% in the event of phase failure
Setting (nominal motor current)
By setting dial on front face of relay
Sealing
Yes
c Not for use with soft start units or variable speed controllers.
Tripping curve LR9-D
Average operating times
depending on multiples
of the current setting
100
1
2
10
1
0
1 1,12 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
75
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Selection – 3-pole bi-metallic overload relays
Class 10 c bi-metallic overload relays LRk-D
Thermal overload relays
- ambient compensated with manual or automatic reset
- relay trip indicator
- for AC or DC
- with or without single-phase sensitivity
By circuit breaker
Select in accordance with NEC and local codes
By fuses
Maximum 400% of motor FLA
European type fuses maximum rating
For direct mounting beneath
contactor
Catalog number
LC1
LP1
With single
phase
sensitivity
Without single
phase
sensitivity
kg (lb)
Short -circuit protection for North American applications
Relay setting
range
LR2-D13kk
LR2-D23kk
Weight
aM
gG
BS88
A
A
A
A
0.10 to 0.16
0.25
2
–
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1301
LR3-D1301
0.165 (0.363)
0.16 to 0.25
0.5
2
–
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1302
LR3-D1302
0.165 (0.363)
0.25 to 0.40
1
2
–
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1303
LR3-D1303
0.165 (0.363)
0.40 to 0.63
1
2
–
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1304
LR3-D1304
0.165 (0.363)
0.63 to 1
2
4
–
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1305
LR3-D1305
0.165 (0.363)
1 to 1.6
2
4
6
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1306
LR3-D1306
0.165 (0.363)
1.6 to 2.5
4
6
10
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1307
LR3-D1307
0.165 (0.363)
2.5 to 4
6
10
16
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1308
LR3-D1308
0.165 (0.363)
4 to 6
8
16
16
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1310
LR3-D1310
0.165 (0.363)
5.5 to 8
12
20
20
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1312
LR3-D1312
0.165 (0.363)
7 to 10
12
20
20
D09 to D38
D09 to D32
LR2-D1314
LR3-D1314
0.165 (0.363)
9 to 13
16
25
25
D12 to D38
D12 to D32
LR2-D1316
LR3-D1316
0.165 (0.363)
12 to 18
20
35
32
D18 to D38
D18 to D32
LR2-D1321
LR3-D1321
0.165 (0.363)
17 to 25
25
50
50
D25 to D38
D25 and D32
LR2-D1322
LR3-D1322
0.165 (0.363)
23 to 32
40
63
63
D25 to D38
D25 and D32
LR2-D2353
LR3-D2353
0.320 (0.704)
30 to 40
40
80
80
D32 and D38
D32
LR2-D2355
LR3-D2355
0.320 (0.704)
17 to 25
25
50
50
D40 to D95
D40 to D80
LR2-D3322
LR3-D3322
0.510 (1.122)
23 to 32
40
63
63
D40 to D95
D40 to D80
LR2-D3353
LR3-D3353
0.510 (1.122)
30 to 40
40
100
80
D40 to D95
D40 to D80
LR2-D3355
LR3-D3355
0.510 (1.122)
37 to 50
63
100
100
D50 to D95
D50 to D80
LR2-D3357
LR3-D3357
0.510 (1.122)
48 to 65
63
100
100
D50 to D95
D50 to D80
LR2-D3359
LR3-D3359
0.510 (1.122)
55 to 70
80
125
125
D65 to D95
D65 and D80
LR2-D3361
LR3-D3361
0.510 (1.122)
63 to 80
80
125
125
D80 and D95
D80
LR2-D3363
LR3-D3363
0.510 (1.122)
80 to 104
100
160
160
D95
–
LR2-D3365
LR3-D3365
0.510 (1.122)
80 to 104
125
200
160
D115 and D150
–
LR2-D4365
LR3-D4365
0.900 (1.98)
95 to 120
125
224
200
D115 and D150
–
LR2-D4367
LR3-D4367
0.900 (1.98)
110 to 140
160
250
200
D150
–
LR2-D4369
LR3-D4369
0.900 (1.98)
Thermal overload relays for use on 1000 V supplies
For relays LR2-D1301 to LR2-D1321 only, for an operating voltage of 1000 V
and only for independent mounting, the reference becomes LR2-D33kkA66.
Example: LR3-D1312 becomes LR2-D3312A66.
Order an LA7-D3064 terminal block separately, see pages 78 and 79.
LR2-D33kk
c Standard IEC 947-4 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR: class 10: between 2 and 10 seconds.
76
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection - 3-pole bimetallic and solid state overload relays
Class 20 q bi-metallic overload relays, LRk-D
- ambient compensated with manual or automatic reset
- relay trip indicator
- for AC or DC
- with or without single phase sensitivity
Thermal overload relays
By circuit breaker
Select in accordance with NEC and local codes
By fuses
Maximum 400% of motor FLA
European type fuses maximum rating
For direct mounting beneath
contactor
Catalog number
LC1
LP1
With single
phase
sensitivity
Without single
phase
sensitivity
kg (lb.)
Short -circuit protection for North American applications
Relay setting
range
LR2-D15kk
Weight
aM
gG
BS88
A
A
A
A
2.5 to 4
6
10
16
D09 to D32
D09 to D32
LR2-D1508
LR3-D1508
0.190 (0.418)
4 to 6
8
16
16
D09 to D32
D09 to D32
LR2-D1510
LR3-D1510
0.190 (0.418)
5.5 to 8
12
20
20
D09 to D32
D09 to D32
LR2-D1512
LR3-D1512
0.190 (0.418)
7 to 10
16
20
25
D09 to D32
D09 to D32
LR2-D1514
LR3-D1514
0.190 (0.418)
9 to 13
16
25
25
D12 to D32
D12 to D32
LR2-D1516
LR3-D1516
0.190 (0.418)
12 to 18
25
35
40
D18 to D32
D18 to D32
LR2-D1521
LR3-D1521
0.190 (0.418)
17 to 25
32
50
50
D25 and D32
D25 and D32
LR2-D1522
LR3-D1522
0.190 (0.418)
23 to 32
40
63
63
D25 and D32
D25 and D32
LR2-D2553
LR3-D2553
0.345 (0.759)
17 to 25
32
50
50
D40 to D95
D40 to D80
LR2-D3522
LR3-D3522
0.535 (1.179)
23 to 32
40
63
63
D40 to D95
D40 to D80
LR2-D3553
LR3-D3553
0.535 (1.179)
30 to 40
50
100
80
D40 to D95
D40 to D80
LR2-D3555
LR3-D3555
0.535 (1.179)
37 to 50
63
100
100
D50 to D95
D50 to D80
LR2-D3557
LR3-D3557
0.535 (1.179)
48 to 65
80
125
100
D50 to D95
D50 to D80
LR2-D3559
LR3-D3559
0.535 (1.179)
55 to 70
100
125
125
D65 to D95
D65 to D80
LR2-D3561
LR3-D3561
0.535 (1.179)
63 to 80
100
160
125
D80 and D95
D80
LR2-D3563
LR3-D3563
0.535 (1.179)
LR2-D25kk
Class 10 and 20 q solid state overload relays, LR9D
- ambient compensated and single phase sensitivity
- trip indicator
- for AC only
- for direct mounting on contactor or independent panel mounting a
Thermal overload relays
By circuit breaker
Select in accordance with NEC and local codes
By fuses
Maximum 400% of motor FLA
European type fuses maximum rating
For direct mounting
beneath contactor
Catalog number
aM
gG
LC1
A
A
160
250
D115 and 150
LR9-D5369
0.885 (1.947)
200
250
D115 and 150
LR9-D5569
0.885 (1.947)
Short -circuit protection for North American applications
Relay setting range
A
Weight
kg (lb.)
Class 10 q
90 to 150
LR2-D35kk
Class 20 q
90 to 150
a Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of an LA9-F103 insulated terminal block, to be ordered separately (see
page 79).
q Standard IEC 947-4 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR:
Class 10: between 2 and 10 seconds
Class 20: between 2 and 20 seconds
77
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Selection – overload relay accessories
LA7-D1064
DX1-AP25
LA7-D305
LR2-D
LA7-D03
R
LR2-D1
LR3-D1
LA7-D03
LA7-D901
LA7-D2064
DX1-AP26
ZA2-BZ13
LR2-D
LA7-D1020
LR2-D2
LR3-D2
ZA2-BL432
LA7-D3064
ZA2-BZ13
LA7-D902
LA7-D1020
ZA2-BA639
LR2-D3
LR3-D3
78
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Selection – overload relay accessories
Accessories LRk-D (to be ordered separately)
For use with relays
Sold in lots of
Catalog number
Weight
kg (lb.)
LR2-D1, LR3-D1
1
LA7-D1064 c
0.100 (0.220)
LR2-D2, LR3-D2
1
LA7-D2064 c
o.120 (0.264)
LR2-D3, LR3-D3
1
LA7-D3064 c a
0.205 (0.451)
Power terminals adaptor for mounting an
LRk-D13 overload relay beneath an
LC1-D40, D50 or D65 contactor
LR2-D13, LR3-D13
1
LA7-D1058
0.080 (0.176)
Power terminals adaptor for mounting an
LR2-D13 overload relay beneath an
LC1-D115 or D150 contactor
LR2-D3
1
LA7-D3058
0.080 (0.176)
LR2-D1, LR3-D1
10
DX1-AP25 q
0.065 (0.143)
LR2-D2, LR3-D2
10
DX1-AP26 q
0.082 (0.180)
LR2-D3, LR3-D3
1
LA7-D902 q
0.130 (0.286)
LR2-D, LR3-D, LR9-D
100
LA7-D903
0.001 (0.002)
1
LA9-D91
0.001 (0.002)
Description
Terminal blocks for clip-on mounting on 35 mm
DIN rail (AM1-DP200) or for screw mounting.
Mounting plates for screw mounting on 4.33 in.
(110 mm) centers
Marker holder
snap-in
Bag of 400 labels
–
(blank, self-adhesive) 0.276 x 0.630 in. (7 x 16 mm)
LA9-F103
Locking device for Stop button
LR2-D, LR3-D
10
LA7-D901
0.005 (0.011)
Remote tripping and electrical reset device
LR2-D, LR3-D, LR9-D u
1
LA7-D03 k f t
0.090 (0.198)
IP20 Finger-safe™ terminal block
for power cabling
LR9-D
2
LA9-F103
0.560 (1.232)
Extruded lugs for power cabling
LR9-D
LR9-D
1
1
DZ2-FG1
DZ2FG6 (pkg. of 6)
LR2-D, LR3-D, LR9-D
1
LA7-D305
0.075 (0.165)
Reset function
By flexible cable (length = 1.64 ft., 0.5 m)
Stop and/or Reset function
Drawing of lug
DX2FG
must be made
For mounting, remove the terminal protection shrouds and order the following 3 products:
Adaptor for door mounted operator
LR2-D, LR3-D, LR9-D
1
LA7-D1020
0.005 (0.011)
Rod (snap-off end to obtain required length
between .670 and 4.728 in., 17 and 120 mm)
LR2-D, LR3-D, LR9-D
10
ZA2-BZ13
0.100 (0.220)
Operating head for spring return pushbutton LR9-D
LR2-D, LR3-D
1
ZA2-BL432 (red)
ZA2-BA639 (blue)
0.012 (0.026)
Terminal blocks are supplied with terminals protected against direct finger contact and ready-to-tighten screws.
Add suffix “6” for terminals for ring type connectors. For example: LA7-D3064 becomes LA7-D30646.
Remember to order the LA7-Dk064 terminal block corresponding to the overload relay size.
The time for which the coil of remote tripping and electrical resetting device LA7-D03 can remain energized depends on its rest time: 1s pulse duration
with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time; maximum pulse duration of 20 s with a rest time of 300s.
Minimum impulse time: 200 ms.
t Reference to be completed by adding the coil voltage code below.
c
a
q
f
t Control circuit voltages
Volts
12
24
48
96
110
220/230
380/400
415/440
50/60 Hz AC
–
B
E
–
F
M
Q
N
E
DD
F
M
–
–
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA
DC
J
B
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W.
u For remote reset applications only when used with LR9Dkkkk solid state overload relays.
79
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Dimensions – 3-pole bi-metallic overload relays LR2 or LR3-D
LR2, LR3-D1
Mounting beneath contactors
LC1-D09 to D32, LP1-D09 to D38 and LP4-D12
35mm DIN rail
d
AM1-Dkkkk
LC1-D09, D12,
D18
AM1-DE200
2
9.5
81
47 (1)
b
e
LC1-D25
d
bc
c
e
98
50
0
86
108
55
LC1-D32, D38
86
109
55
8.1
LP1-D09, D12,
D18
81
133
50
0
g
10.7
8
LP1-D25
86
152
55
10.7
17
LP1-D32
86
153
55
8.1
LP4-D12
81
98
50
0
b
c
e
g
97.5
98
60
1.5
98
60
0.5
LP1-D25
97.5
155
60
1.5
LP1-D32
97.5
155
60
0.5
92
c
AM1-DP200
44
g
c + 5 mm for LR2-D15kk
LR2, LR3-D2
Direct mounting beneath contactors
LC1-D25 to D38, LP1-D25 and D32
35mm DIN rail
d
AM1-Dkkkk
AM1-DP200
AM1-DE200
2
9.5
LC1-D25
97.5
59
b
e
LC1-D32, D38
92
c
13
d
22
54
g
LR2, LR3-D3
Direct mounting beneath contactors
LC1-D40 to D95 and LP1-D40 to D80
75mm DIN rail
d
54
b
e
AM1-DLkkk
109
4
c
21
d
AM1-DL201
AM1-DL200
7
17
b
c
e
g (3P)
g (4P)
LC1-D40
111
119
72.4
4.5
13
LC1-D50
111
119
72.4
4.5
–
LC1-D65
111
119
72.4
4.5
13
LC1-D80
115.5
124
76.9
9.5
22
LC1-D95
115.5
124
76.9
9.5
–
LP1-D40
111
176
72.4
4.5
13
LP1-D50
111
176
72.4
4.5
–
LP1-D65
111
176
72.4
4.5
13
LP1-D80
115.5
179.4
76.9
9.5
22
30
70
g
80
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Dimensions – 3-pole bimetallic and solid-state overload relays LR•-D
189
150
267
LR2-D4 bimetallic overload relay
Direct mounting beneath contactors
LC1-D115 and D150
132
120
d
35mm DIN rail dimensions
d
AM1-DP200 and DR200
AM1-DEkkk and EDkkk
2.5
10.5
255
174
136
LR9-D solid-state overload relay
Direct mounting beneath contactors
LC1-D115 and D150
132
120
d
35mm DIN rail dimensions
d
AM1-DP200 and DR200
AM1-DEkkk and EDkkk
2.5
10.5
81
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Mounting – 3-pole bi-metallic overload relays LR2 or LR3-D
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LR2, LR3-D1
Independent mounting on 50 mm centers or on 35mm wide DIN rail AM1-DP200 or DE200
Independent mounting on 110 mm centers
45
=
46
35
=
LA7-D1064
=
=
98
d
110
125
79
43.5
4
50/60(1)
=
LA7-D1064
8
2xØ4.5
=
17
35mm wide DIN rail dimensions
d
108
AM1-DP200
AM1-DE200
2
9.5
DX1-AP25
2xØ6.5
(1) + 5 mm for LR2-D15kk
LR2, LR3-D3, LR9D
Remote trip or electrical reset device
LA7-D03 c
96
29
(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relays LR2, LR3-D1
LR2, LR3-D2
Independent mounting on 50 mm centers or on 35mm wide DIN rail AM1-DP200 or DE200
Independent mounting on 110 mm centers
55
=
57
40
=
LA7-D2064
=
=
98
d
2xØ4.5
110
125
43.5
90
50/60
3
=
LA7-D2064
13
=
22
108
35mm wide DIN rail dimensions
d
AM1-DP200
AM1-DE200
2
9.5
DX1-AP26
2xØ6.5
Remote tripping or electrical reset device
LA7-D03 c
96
29
c Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relays LR2, LR3-D2
82
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Mounting – 3-pole bi-metallic and solid-state overload relays
LRk-D
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LR2, LR3-D1
Independent mounting on 50 mm centers or on 35mm wide DIN rail AM1-DP200 or DE200
Independent mounting on 110 mm centers
50
=
d
LA7-D3064
126
75/87
100
51.5
121
=
=
110
=
2
LA7-D3064
75
LA7-D902
75
3xØ6.5
23.5
2xØ4.5
32
131
=
40
=
35mm wide DIN rail dimension
d
AM1-DP200
AM1-DE200
2
9.5
(1) + 5 mm for LR2-D15ii
LR2, LR3-D3, LR9D
Remote trip or electrical reset
LA7-D03 c
119
21
c Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relays LR2, LR3-D1. For mounting on RH side of LR9D only for remote reset applications. Will not mount on LH side of LR9D for remote tripping
applications.
83
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Mounting – 3-pole bi-metallic and solid-state overload relays
LA7-D1020
Adaptor for door mounted operator
c
10
Stop
Reset
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LA7-D1020
c: adjustable from 17 to 120 mm
LA7-D305
“Reset” by flexible cable
Mounting with cable straight
Mounting with cable bent
LA7-D305
e
c
e
c: up to 550 mm
M10x1
e: up to 20 mm
e: up to 20 mm
84
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Low consumption contactors
LP4-D contactors and LP5-D reversing contactors operate on a low-level DC supply.
Their low consumption operating coil allows direct control from solid state outputs without the need for
additional interface modules or interposing relays in the control circuit.
They are available in 4 versions:
LP4-D1210
• Contactors with standard low consumption coil.
• Contactors with low consumption coil with bidirectional peak limiting diode for built-in suppression.
This version provides a perfect working combination between power and electronic circuits.
• Contactors with wide range low consumption coils, allowing correct operation between 0.7 and 1.25
of the control voltage Uc. These are essential where solid state components are connected in series
with the control circuit or on machines based on special-purpose electronic cards.
Contactors LP4-D and LP5-D can be used for the control of motors in category AC-3 up to 25 A (15
hp at 460 VAC).
• Contactors with wide range low consumption coils with built-in suppression as standard via
bidirectional peak limiting diode, allowing correct operation between 0.7 and 1.25 of the control
voltage (Uc).
Benefits
Low heat dissipation: allowing higher component density in control panels.
Use on battery supplies: for on-board equipment, use on battery supply allows easy backup and
independent supply shared with programmable controllers.
Thermal protection: Telemecanique bi-metallic overload relays can be used with these low
consumption contactors.
Uniform design: low consumption contactors are the same size as standard contactors LC1-D09 and
LC1-D12.
Variable composition: low consumption contactors can be fitted with special front-mounting auxiliary
blocks. LP4-D contactors can also be fitted with electronic serial timer modules LA4-DT and Auto-ManStop interface modules LA4-DM.
–
+
DC supply
Programmable
Logic
Controller
Printed
Circuit
Board
CA4-D
LC1-F
LR9F
LP5-D
LP4-D
LR2-D
LR2-D
85
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Characteristics - Low consumption contactors LP4-D and LP5-D
Environment
Conforming to standards
Meets the essential requirements of the LV & EMC
directives
IEC 158-1, 255-1, 337-1, 947-1 and 947-4, VDE 0660, NF C
63-110 and 45-250, BS 5424, JIS C8325, JEM 1038
Approvals
E164862
CCN NLDX
LR43364
Class 3211 04
ASE, UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, FI
Protective treatment
Standard version
“TH”
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Protection against direct finger contact
Maximum operating altitude
Without derating
3000m (9800 ft.)
Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage
- 40 to + 80°C (-40...+176°F)
Operation (0.8 to 1.1 Uc)
- 5 to + 55°C (+23...+131°F)
For operation at Uc
- 25 to + 70°C (-13 to +158°F)
Without derating in the following positions
30 °
Stranded cable without cable end
Power pole cabling
Stranded cable with cable end
Solid cable without cable end
°
90
°
1 conductor
2 conductors
LPk-D12
AWG
17 to 12
17 to 12
LPk-D18
mm2
1 to 4
1 to 4
LPk-D25
AWG
mm2
16 to 10
1.5 to 6
16 to 10
1.5 to 6
LPk-D12
AWG
17 to 12
17 to 14
LPk-D18
mm2
1 to 4
1 to 4
LPk-D25
AWG
mm2
17 to 10
1 to 6
17 to 12
1 to 4
LPk-D12
AWG
17 to 12
17 to 12
LPk-D18
mm2
1 to 4
1 to 4
LPk-D25
AWG
mm2
16 to 10
1.5 to 6
16 to 10
1.5 to 6
Control connections
1.2 Nkm (10 lb.-in.)
Power connections
1.2 Nkm (10 lb.-in.)
90
30
°
180 °
Operating positions for ambient
temperature ≤ 55 °C (131 °F)
Tightening torque
86
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Characteristics - Low consumption contactors LP4-D and LP5-D
Control circuit characteristics
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to VDE D110 (group C)
V
250
Conforming to IEC 158-1, BS 5424
V
250
300
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n° 14
V
Maximum voltage
Of the control circuit, a
V
Shock resistance c
1/2 sine wave 11 ms
Contactor open
10 gn
Contactor closed
12 gn
Contactor open
5 gn
Vibration resistance c
5 to 300 Hz
Contactor closed
10 gn
Average consumption
DC supply
Standard coil
(0.8 to 1.1 Uc)
Wide range coil
(0.7 to 1.25 Uc)
Operating time a
at Uc and at 68 °F (20 °C)
“C”
“O”
Control circuit voltage limits
72
1.2
LPk- D18
W
1.6
1.6
LPk-D25
W
2
2
LPk-D12
W
1.6
1.6
LPk-D18
W
2
2
LPk-D25
W
2.4
2.4
LPk-D12
ms
60
LPk-D18
ms
50
LPk-D25
ms
60
LPk-D12
ms
15
LPk-D18
ms
15
LPk-D25
ms
15
0.8 to 1.1 Uc
0.1 to 0.3 Uc
Time constant (L/R)
ms
LP4-Dkk
In millions of operating cycles
Maximum operating rate
At ambient temperature ≤ 131 °F (55 °C)
1.2
W
Drop-out
Mechanical life
(mechanical durability)
Sealed
LPk-D12
Operational
θ ≤ 131 °F, (55 °C)
Inrush
10
30
LP5-Dkk
20
Op cycs/h
3600
c Without change of contact state , in the least favorable direction.
a Closing time “C” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles.
Opening time “O” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
87
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Characteristics - Low consumption contactors LP4-D and LP5-D
Pole characteristics
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to VDE 0110 C
V
750
To IEC 158-1, 947-1, BS 5424, NF C 20-040
V
690
Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n° 14, UL 508
Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp)
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith)
For θ ≤ 104 °F (40 °C)
V
600
kV
8
LPk-D12
A
20
LPk-D18
A
25
LPk-D25
A
40
Frequency limits
Hz
25 to 400
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
V
690
LPk-D12
A
230
LPk-D18
A
300
LPk-D25
A
430
Rated making capacity
Rated breaking capacity
I rms
Permissible short time rating
from cold state (θ ≤ 104 °F, 40 °C)
Conforming to IEC 158-1
and IEC 947-4
Conforming to IEC 158-1 and IEC 947-4
V
220
380
415
440
500
660/690
LPk-D12
A
230
230
230
230
175
85
LPk-D18
A
300
300
300
300
250
120
LPk-D25
A
430
430
430
415
350
150
1s
5s
10 s
30 s
1 min
In free air, for
Pole impedance
At 50 Hz, at Ith
Operation in category AC-1
(resistive circuits, heating, lighting)
Maximum operational current
Rated operational power,
depending on voltage
50 or 60 Hz 3-phase
3 min
10 min
LPk-D12
A
210
130
105
76
61
44
30
LPk-D18
A
240
185
145
105
84
58
40
LPk-D25
A
380
280
240
155
120
80
50
mΩ
3
θ ≤ 104 °F (40 °C)
θ ≤ 131 °F (55 °C)
LPk-D12
A
20
16
LPk-D18
A
25
20
LPk-D25
A
40
V
220/230
380/400
415
440
500
660/690
LPk-D12
kW
8
13
14
15
17
23
LPk-D18
kW
9
15
17
18
20
27
LPk-D25
kW
14
25
27
29
33
43
Increase in operational thermal current by parallel
connection of poles. Apply these coefficients to the
maximum currents above. The coefficients take into
account the often unbalanced current distribution
between poles. Use connecting links to connect 2 poles
in parallel.
Operation in category AC-3
(squirrel cage motors)
Rated operational power, depending
on voltage
50 or 60 Hz 3-phase.
Standard motor power ratings
2 poles in parallel : k = 1.6
3 poles in parallel : k = 2.25
V
220/230
380/400
415
440
500
660/690
LPk-D12
kW
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
LPk-D18
kW
4
7.5
9
9
10
10
LPk-D25
kW
5.5
11
11
11
15
15
V
230
460
600
LPk-D12
hp
3
7.5
10
LP4-D18
hp
5
10
15
LP5-D18
hp
5
10
10
LP4-D25
hp
5
15
20
LP5-D25
hp
5
15
Motor power ratings conforming to UL, CSA
Maximum operating rate (in cycles/hour) depending
on the % of the rated operational power P
Short circuit protection
32
15
On-load factor
Operational power
Cycles/hour
≤ 85 %
P
1200
≤ 85 %
0.5 P
3000
≤ 25 %
P
1800
By circuit breaker
Select in accordance with NEC and local codes
By fuses
Maximum 40% of motor FLA
88
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Characteristics - Low consumption contactors LP4-D and LP5-D
Electrical life
LP●-D18
3
4
LP●-D25
LP●-D12
Millions of operating cycles
Utilization category AC-1 and operational voltage <440 V
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
5
6
7
8
9 10
15
20
25
30
40
Current broken in A
Millions of operating cycles
LP●-D25
LP●-D18
LP●-D12
Utilization category AC-3 and operational voltage < 440 V
44
33
2,5
2.5
22
1.5
1,5
11
3
44
5
6
7
8
9 10
10
12
15
15
18
18 20
25
25
30
40
50
Current broken in A
89
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
References – Low consumption contactors
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole contactors for Finger-safe™ terminals for power cabling
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
LP4-D1210BD
Rated
operational
current in AC-3
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
500V
660V
690V
440 V
up to
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
2.2
3
4
5.5
4
5.5
7.5
11
4
5.5
9
11
4
5.5
9
11
5.5
7.5
10
15
5.5
7.5
10
15
9
12
18
25
Maximum
operational
current in AC-1
θ ≤ 55 °C
Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
A
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control
circuit voltage a q
Weight
N/O
N/C
DIN rail or mounting c
kg (lb.)
1
–
LP4-D0910kk(k)
0.315 (0.693)
–
1
LP4-D0901kk(k)
0.315 (0.693)
1
–
LP4-D1210kk(k)
0.315 (0.693)
20
20
–
1
LP4-D1201kk(k)
0.315 (0.693)
1
–
LP4-D1810kk(k)
0.320 (0.704)
–
1
LP4-D1801kk(k)
0.320 (0.704)
–
–
LP4-D2500kk(k)
0.355 (0.781)
25
40
c Clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting. Power terminals: protected against direct finger contact and ready-to-wire terminals
a Coil selection
Standard coils (0.8 to 1.1 Uc) q
Volts AC
5
12
24
48
72
Code
AD
JD
BD
ED
SD
Coils fitted with integral bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor (0.8 to 1.1 Uc) q
Volts AC
5
12
24
48
72
Code
AD3
JD3
BD3
ED3
SD3
Volts AC
24
48
72
Operating range
17 to 30 V
34 to 60 V
50 to 90 V
Code
BW
EW
SW
Wide range coils (0.7 to 1.25 Uc) q
Wide range coils fitted with integral bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor (0.7 to 1.25 Uc) q
Volts AC
24
48
Operating range
17 to 30 V
34 to 60 V
72
50 to 90 V
Code
BW3
EW3
SW3
q Coil not interchangeable.
90
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
References – Low consumption contactors
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
3-pole contactors for Finger-safe™ terminals for power cabling
Maximum horsepower rating
Maximum
inductive
current in AC-3
category
1-phase 50/60Hz
3-phase 50/60Hz
LP4-D1210BD
115V
120V
230V
240V
200V
208V
220V
240V
460V
480V
600V
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5
1
1
2
2
3
2
5
3
7.5
7.5
10
A
9
12
Maximum
operational
current in AC-1
θ ≤ 55 °C
Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
N/O
N/C
1
–
A
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control
circuit voltage a q
Weight
DIN rail or mounting c
kg (lb.)
LP4-D0910kk(k)
0.315 (0.693)
20
–
1
LP4-D0901kk(k)
0.315 (0.693)
1
–
LP4-D1210kk(k)
0.315 (0.693)
20
1
3
5
5
10
15
18
25
1
3
7.5
7.5
15
20
25
40
–
1
LP4-D1201kk(k)
0.315 (0.693)
1
–
LP4-D1810kk(k)
0.320 (0.704)
–
1
LP4-D1801kk(k)
0.320 (0.704)
–
–
LP4-D2500kk(k)
0.355 (0.781)
c Clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting. Power terminals: protected against direct finger contact and ready-to-wire terminals
a Coil selection
Standard coils (0.8 to 1.1 Uc) q
Volts AC
5
12
24
48
72
Code
AD
JD
BD
ED
SD
Coils fitted with integral bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor (0.8 to 1.1 Uc) q
Volts AC
5
12
24
48
72
Code
AD3
JD3
BD3
ED3
SD3
Volts AC
24
48
72
Operating range
17 to 30 V
34 to 60 V
50 to 90 V
Code
BW
EW
SW
Wide range coils (0.7 to 1.25 Uc) q
Wide range coils fitted with integral bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor (0.7 to 1.25 Uc) q
Volts AC
24
48
Operating range
17 to 30 V
34 to 60 V
72
50 to 90 V
Code
BW3
EW3
SW3
q Coil not interchangeable.
91
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
References – Low consumption reversing contactors
Pre-assembled, horizontally mounted, pre-wired power connections
Kilowatt ratings for international applications
3-pole reversing contactors for Finger-safe™ terminals for power cabling
Pre-wired power connections
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
LP4-D1210BD
Rated operational
current in AC-3
Maximum
Instantaneous
operational
auxiliary contact
current in AC-1
θ ≤ 55 °C
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control
circuit voltage a q
Weight
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
500V
660V
690V
440 V
up to
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
A
N/O
N/C
DIN rail or mounting c
kg (lb.)
2.2
4
4
4
5.5
5.5
9
20
1
–
LP5-D0910kk(k)
0.670 (1.474)
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
12
20
1
–
LP5-D1210kk(k)
0.670 (1.474)
4
7.5
9
9
10
10
18
25
1
–
LP5-D1810kk(k)
0.680 (1.496)
5.5
11
11
11
15
15
25
40
–
–
LP5-D2500kk(k)
0.770 (1.694)
c Clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting. Power terminals: protected against direct finger contact and ready-to-wire terminals
a Coil selection
Standard coils (0.8 to 1.1 Uc) q
Volts AC
5
12
24
48
72
Code
AD
JD
BD
ED
SD
Coils fitted with integral bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor (0.8 to 1.1 Uc) q
Volts AC
5
12
24
48
72
Code
AD3
JD3
BD3
ED3
SD3
Volts AC
24
48
72
Operating range
17 to 30 V
34 to 60 V
50 to 90 V
Code
BW
EW
SW
Wide range coils (0.7 to 1.25 Uc) q
Wide range coils fitted with integral bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor (0.7 to 1.25 Uc) q
Volts AC
24
48
Operating range
17 to 30 V
34 to 60 V
72
50 to 90 V
Code
BW3
EW3
SW3
q Coil not interchangeable.
92
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Low consumption reversing contactors
Pre-assembled, horizontally mounted, pre-wired power connections
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
3-pole reversing contactors with Finger-safe™ terminals for power cabling
Maximum horsepower rating
LP5-D1210BD
Maximum
inductive
current in AC-3
category
Maximum
operational
current in AC-1
θ ≤ 55 °C
hp
A
A
7.5
9
20
1
–
7.5
10
12
20
1
–
LP5-D1210kk(k)
0.670 (1.474)
5
10
15
18
25
1
–
LP5-D1810kk(k)
0.680 (1.496)
7.5
15
20
25
40
–
–
LP5-D2500kk(k)
0.770 (1.694)
1-phase 50/60Hz
3-phase 50/60Hz
115V
120V
230V
240V
200V
208V
220V
240V
460V
480V
600V
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5
1
2
2
5
1
2
3
3
1
3
5
1
3
7.5
Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control
circuit voltage a q
Weight
DIN rail or mounting c
kg (lb.)
LP5-D0910kk(k)
0.670 (1.474)
c Clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail AM1-DP or screw mounting. Power terminals: protected against direct finger contact and ready-to-wire terminals
a Coil selection
Standard coils (0.8 to 1.1 Uc) q
Volts AC
5
12
24
48
72
Code
AD
JD
BD
ED
SD
Coils fitted with integral bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor (0.8 to 1.1 Uc) q
Volts AC
5
12
24
48
72
Code
AD3
JD3
BD3
ED3
SD3
Volts AC
24
48
72
Operating range
17 to 30 V
34 to 60 V
50 to 90 V
Code
BW
EW
SW
Wide range coils (0.7 to 1.25 Uc) q
Wide range coils fitted with integral bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor (0.7 to 1.25 Uc) q
Volts AC
24
48
Operating range
17 to 30 V
34 to 60 V
72
50 to 90 V
Code
BW3
EW3
SW3
q Coil not interchangeable.
93
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Accessories for low consumption contactors
LA9-D1261
LA4-DMK
LA9-D1260
LA9-D1262
LA4-DT
LA9-D1263
LP5-D
LP4-D
LN1-DN11
LA9-D92
LA9-D93
LA9-D90
LA9-D91
LR2-D1
94
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection – Accessories for low consumption contactors
Type LPk-D
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks
Front clip-on mounting on
Number of contacts
LP4, LP5
2
Composition
N/O
N/C
1
1
Catalog number
Weight
LN1-DN11
0.030 (0.066)
kg (lb.)
Electronic serial timer modules
Type
Time delay
For use on
Operational voltage c
Catalog number
Weight
kg (lb.)
On-delay
0.1 to 2 s
LP4, LP5
AC 24/72 V
LA4-DT0U
0.040 (0.088)
1.5 to 30 s
LP4, LP5
AC 24/72 V
LA4-DT2U
0.040 (0.088)
25 to 500 s
LP4, LP5
AC 24/72 V
LA4-DT4U
0.040 (0.088)
For use on
Operational voltage
Catalog number
Auto-Man-Stop control module
For local override operation tests
Weight
kg (lb.)
With “O-I” switch and 2-position “Auto-Man” switch
LP4, LP5
AC 24/72 V
LA4-DMK
0.040 (0.088)
3-pole bi-metallic overload relays
Compensated, with manual or automatic reset
For mounting beneath contactor
Relay setting range
Type
Catalog number
Weight
kg (lb.)
0.1 to 0.16 A
up to 17 to 25 A
LP4 or LP5
With single-phase sensitivity
LR2-D1kkk a
0.165 (0.363)
Without single-phase sensitivity
LR3-D1kkk a
0.165 (0.363)
Accessories
Description
For use on
Sold in lots of
Catalog number
Weight
kg (lb.)
Connector for cable connection
Paralleling links for
4-pole, 10 mm2
LPk-D09, D12, D18
1
LA9-D1260
0.030 (0.066)
3-pole, 25 mm2
LPk-D25
1
LA9-D3260
0.040 (0.088)
2 poles
LP4-D09, D12, D18
10
LA9-D1261
0.012 (0.026)
3 poles
LP4-D09, D12, D18
10
LA9-D1262
0.003 (0.007)
4 poles
LP4-D09, D12, D18
2
LA9-D1263
0.024 (0.053)
8 x 22 mm clip-in legend holder
LP4, LP5
100
LA9-D92
0.001 (0.002)
8 x 17 mm clip-in legend holder
LN1-DN
100
LA9-D90
0.001 (0.002)
Bag of 300 blank, self-adhesive legend plates - 7 x 21 mm
Marker holder LA9-D92
1
LA9-D93
0.001 (0.002)
Bag of 400 blank, self-adhesive legend plates - 7 x 16 mm
Marker holder LA9-D90
1
LA9-D91
0.001 (0.002)
c For 24 V operation, the contactor must have a 24 V wide range coil (code BW).
a Basic reference, to be completed: see page 76 and 77.
95
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Characteristics - Low consumption contactors type LP4-D
Auxiliary contact blocks
Type
LP4, LP5
LN1-DN11
1 (LP1-D09, D12, D18)
2
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics (add-on or integral)
Number of contacts
Rated operational voltage
Conforming to IEC 947-5; up to
V
690
690
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC 947-5
V
690
690
Rated thermal current (Ith)
Minimum switching capacity
Conforming to UL, CSA
V
600
600
For ambient temperature ≤ 40 °C
A
10
6
U
V
17
17
I
mA
5
5
Short-circuit protection
To IEC 947-5-1 and VDE 0660. gG fuse.
Rated making capacity (rms)
Conforming to IEC 947-5-1
Permissible short time rating
For
A
140
80
A
100
40
500 ms
120
60
100 ms
140
80
> 10
> 10
1s
MΩ
Insulation resistance
Non-overlap time
Guaranteed between N.C. and N.O. contacts
Mechanical durability
In millions of operating cycles
ms
AC supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15
Power broken in VA
1 Breaking limit of contacts for:
a maximum of 50 operating cycles,
at 10 s intervals (power broken = making
power x ϕ 0.7).
2 Electrical durability of contacts:
- for 1 million operating cycles (2a),
- for 3 million operating cycles (2b),
- for 10 million operating cycles (2c).
1500
1000
800
600
1
4 Thermal limit.
4
400
4000
250
200
4
200
100
80
60
2a
140
2000
3 Breaking limit of contacts for:
a maximum of 20 operating cycles,
at 10 s intervals and with current passing
for 0.5 s per operating cycle.
1,5
30
DC supply, category DC-13
Power broken in W
15 000
10 000
8000
6000
2
30
1
2a
1000
800
600
2b
40
400
100
2b
2c
20
200
2c
50
100
80
60
50
10
8
6
20
4
12
24
48
110
220
380 660 V
12
24
48
110
220 380 500
125/127
440 660 V
96
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions, mounting – Low consumption contactors and reversing contactors
Dimensions shown in millimeters
(mm X .0394 = inches)
Type LPk-D
Dimensions
c1 (LN1-DN11)
10
c
b
b2 (LA4-DM)
b1 (LA4-DT)
c
b
10
45
c1 (LN1-DN11)
b2 (LA4-DM)
LP5-D
b1 (LA4-DT)
LP4-D
103
b
b1
b2
c
c1
b
b1
b2
c
c1
LP4-D09, D12, D18
74
97
104
78.5
111
LP5-D09, D12, D18
74
97
104
78.5
111
LP4-D25
76
99
106
87
120
LP5-D25
76
99
106
87
120
Mounting
LP4-D
LP5-D
on rail AM1-D200
on panel with #8 screws
on rail AM1-D200
on panel
4xØ45
60
=
=
c
35
=
=
=
=
60
=
=
=
2xØ45
=
=
c
LPk-D09
LPk-D12
LPk-D18
AM1-DP200
80.5
80.5
80.5
89.1
AM1-DE200
88
88
88
96.6
94
LPk-D25
82
47
51
LRk-D1
50
Mounting of contactors LP4, LP5-D25 with bi-metallic overload relay
LRk-D1
81
Mounting of contactors LP4, LP5-D09, D12 & D18 with bi-metallic overload relay
47
=
d
92
8
d
17
97
92
44
35mm wide DIN rail dimension
8
17
97
44
35mm wide DIN rail dimension
d
d
AM1-DP200
2
AM1-DP200
2
AM1-DE200
9.5
AM1-DE200
9.5
97
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Schemes - Low consumption contactors and reversing contactors
Type LPk-D
Contactors
5/L3
T3/6
1/L1
3/L2
T2/4
T1/2
A1
A2
5/L3
T3/6
21/NC
3/L2
22
1/L1
T2/4
LP4-D2500
3P
T1/2
A1
A2
5/L3
T3/6
13/NO
3/L2
14
1/L1
T2/4
LP4-Dkk01
3P + 1 N.C.
T1/2
A2
A1
LP4-Dkk10
3P + 1 N.O.
Reversing contactors
– K1
1
3
5
2
4
6
U
V
W
A1
L3
5
6
A2
L2
3
4
L1
1
2
A1
A1
A2
21/NC
– K1
62
A2
A2
5
6
W
A1
53/NO
– K2
A2
Add-on auxiliary contact block
LN1-DN11
1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
54
A1
13
3
4
V
LP5-D09-D12-D18
Integral electrical interlocking of the 2 contactors
14
1
2
U
L3
13
5
6
14
L2
3
L1
1
4
A1
A2
LP5-D2500
3P
2
LP5-Dkk10
3P + 1 N.O.
– K2
98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Schemes - Low consumption contactors and reversing contactors
STANDARD CONTACTORS
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which can,
at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies (1 to 15
kHz).
As a general rule, the peak current on energization is lower when:
•
•
•
•
the mains inductances are high,
the line transformer ratings are low,
the transformer short-circuit voltage is high,
the ratio between the sum of the ratings of the capacitors already switched into the circuit and that of
the capacitors to be switched in is small (for multiple step capacitor banks).
In accordance with standards IEC 70, NF C 54-100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must be able to
withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank step being switched.
The rated operational powers given in the tables opposite take this overload into account.
Short-circuit protection is normally provided by gl type HRC fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.
CONTACTOR APPLICATIONS
Operating conditions
Capacitors are directly switched. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed the
values indicated opposite.
An inductor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the peak
current, if necessary.
Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature.
Power factor correction by a single-step capacitor bank
The use of a choke inductor is unnecessary : the inductance of the mains supply is adequate to limit the
peak to a value compatible with the contactor characteristics.
Power factor correction by a multiple-step capacitor bank
Select a special contactor as defined on page 12.
If a standard contactor is used, it is essential to insert a choke inductor in each of the three
phases of each step.
99
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection guide for switching three phase capacitors
International applications only
Capacitor switching
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high
transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies (1 to 15 kHz).
As a general rule, the peak current on energisation is lower when:
- the mains inductances are high,
- the line transformer ratings are low,
- the transformer short-circuit voltage is high,
- the ratio between the sum of the ratings of the capacitors already switched into the circuit and that of the capacitors to be switched in is small (for multiple
step capacitor banks).
In accordance with standards IEC 70, NF C 54-100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the
rated current of the capacitor bank step being switched.
The rated operational powers given in the tables opposite take this overload into account.
Short-circuit protection is normally provided by gl type HRC fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.
E164862
CCN NLDX
LR43364
Class 3211 04
Contactor selection
Operating conditions
Capacitors are directly switched. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed the values indicated on the following page.
Inductors may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the peak current, if necessary.
Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature.
Power factor correction by a single-step capacitor bank
The use of a choke inductor is unnecessary: the inductance of the mains supply is adequate to limit the peak to a value compatible with the contactor
characteristics.
Power factor correction by a multiple-step capacitor bank
Select a special contactor as defined on page 12.
If a standard contactor is used, it is essential to insert a choke inductor in each of the three phases of each step.
100
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Selection guide for switching three phase capacitors
Maximum operational power of contactors: International applications only
Standard contactors
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour.
Electrical durability at maximum load: 100 000 operating cycles.
With choke inductors connected, where necessary.
Operational power at 50/60 Hz
θ ≤ 104 °F (40 °C) c
Maximum peak
current
θ ≤ 131 °F (55 °C) c
Contactor
220 V/240 V
400 V/440 V
600 V/690 V
220 V/240 V
400 V/440 V
600 V/690 V
kVAR
kVAR
kVAR
kVAR
kVAR
kVAR
A
6
11
15
6
11
15
560
LC1-D09, D12
9
15
20
9
15
20
850
LC1-D18
11
20
25
11
20
25
1600
LC1-D25
14
25
30
14
25
30
1900
LC1-D32
17
30
37
17
30
37
2160
LC1-D40
22
40
50
22
40
50
2160
LC1-D50
22
40
50
22
40
50
3040
LC1-D65
35
60
75
35
60
75
3040
LC1-D80, D95
50
90
125
37.5
75
80
3200
LC1-F115
60
110
135
40
85
90
3200
LC1-F150
70
125
160
50
100
100
3500
LC1-F185
80
140
190
60
110
110
4000
LC1-F225
90
160
225
75
125
125
5000
LC1-F265
100
190
275
85
140
165
6500
LC1-F330
125
220
300
100
160
200
8000
LC1-F400
180
300
400
125
220
300
10 000
LC1-F500
250
400
600
190
350
500
12 000
LC1-F630
200
350
500
180
350
500
25 000
LC1-BL
300
550
650
250
500
600
25 000
LC1-BM
500
850
950
400
750
750
25 000
LC1-BP
600
1100
1300
500
1000
1000
25 000
LC1-BR
c Upper limit of temperature category conforming to IEC 70.
101
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Contactors for capacitor switching
LC1-DkK: International applications only
Special contactors
Special contactors LC1-DkK are designed for switching 3-phase, single or multiple-step capacitor banks; they conform to standards IEC 70 and 831,
NFC 54-100, VDE 0560.
Contactor applications
Specification
Contactors fitted with a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the current on closing to 60 In max.
This current limitation at switch-on increases the life of all the components in the installation, in particular that of the fuses and capacitors.
The patented design of the add-on block (n° 90 119-20) guarantees the safety and long life of the installation.
Operating conditions
There is no need to use choke inductors for either single or multiple-step capacitor banks.
Short-circuit protection must be provided by gI type fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.
Maximum operational power
The power values given in the selection table below are for the following operating conditions
LC1-DFK11kk
Prospective peak current at switch-on
LC1-DkK
200 In
Maximum operating rate
LC1-DFK, DGK, DLK, DMK, DPK
240 operating cycles/hour.
LC1-DTK, DWK
100 operating cycles/hour.
Electrical durability
at rated load
Operational power at 50/60 Hz
θ ≤ 131 °F, 55 °C a
LC1-DFK, DGK
400 V
300 000 operating cycles.
LC1-DLK, DMK,
DPK, DTK, DWK
690 V
200 000 operating cycles.
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Tightening torque
on cable end of
power tterminals
Basic reference.
Complete with code indicating
control circuit voltage c
Weight
220 V
400 V
240 V
440 V
690 V
kVAR
kVAR
kVAR
N.O.
N.C.
lb-in (N•m)
6.7
12.5
18
1
1
10.66 (1.2)
LC1-DFK11kk
0.948 (0.430)
–
2
10.66 (1.2)
LC1-DFK02kk
0.948 (0.430)
8.5
16.7
24
1
1
15.10 (1.7)
LC1-DGK11kk
0.992 (0.450)
–
2
15.10 (1.7)
LC1-DGK02kk
0.992 (0.450)
1
1
16.88 (1.9)
LC1-DLK11kk
1.322 (0.600)
–
2
16.88 (1.9)
LC1-DLK02kk
1.322 (0.600)
1
1
22.21 (2.5)
LC1-DMK11kk
1.389 (0.630)
–
2
22.21 (2.5)
LC1-DMK02kk
1.389 (0.630)
10
660 V
20
15
30
25
36
lb (kg)
20
33.3
48
1
2
44.42 (5)
LC1-DPK12kk
2.866 (1.300)
25
40
58
1
2
44.42 (5)
LC1-DTK12kk
2.866 (1.300)
40
60
92
1
2
79.96 (9)
LC1-DWK12kk
3.640 (1.650)
Switching of multiple capacitor banks (with equal or different power ratings).
LC1-DPK12kk
The correct contactor for each step is selected from the above table, according to the power rating of the step to be switched.
Example: 50 kVAR 3-step capacitor bank. Temperature: 122 °F (50 °C) and U = 400 V or 440 V.
One 25 kVAR step: contactor LC1-DMK, one 15 kVAR step: contactor LC1-DGK and one 10 kVAR step: contactor LC1-DFK.
c Standard control circuit voltages
c Coil selection
Volts
24
42
48
110
220
230
240
380
400
415
440
500
660
50 Hz
B5
D5
E5
F5
M5
P5
U5
Q5
V5
N5
R5
S5
Y5
60 Hz
B6
D6
E6
F6
M6
–
U6
Q6
–
–
R6
–
–
50/60
Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
–
–
a The average temperature over a 24-hour period, in accordance with IEC 70 and 831 is 113 °F (45 °C).
102
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Contactors for capacitor switching
Dimensions
180
74
130
c
127
LC1-DPK, DTK
LC1-DFK, DGK
45
75
150
LC1-
c
Contactor
LC1-
DFK
117
LC1-D12
DPK
LC1-D40
DGK
122
LC1-D18
DTK
LC1-D50
LC1-DWK
c
127
200
84
140
LC1-DLK, DMK
Contactor
56
157
LC1-
c
Contactor
LC1-
Contactor
DLK
117
LC1-D25
DWK
LC1-D80
DMK
122
LC1-D32
85
Schemes
LC1-DkK
(1)
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A2
A1
}
–R
–R
R = Resistor connections, pre-wired
(1) Mains supply
(2) Application
}
}
(2)
(3)
(3) Do not connect anything to these 3 auxiliary poles
Cabling
Contactor type LC1-
DFK
Number of conductors
1
2
DGK
1
2
DLK
1
2
DMK
1
2
DPK, DTK
1
2
DWK
1
2
Stranded cable with cable end
2.5
1.5
4
2.5
4
4
6
4
16
6
50
25
Solid cable without cable end
4
4
6
6
10
6
16
10
25
16
50
35
103
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Plate-mounted starters LC4-D: International applications only
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Includes contactor and European style fused disconnect switch on mounting plate.
Utilization category AC-3
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
Operational
current
Fuses to be fitted by
the customer
Size
Catalog number.
Complete with code
indicating control
circuit voltage a c
Weight
12
LC4-D09kk
0.870 (1.918)
220/230 V
380/400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660/690 V
440 up to
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
Class aM
2.2
4
4
4
5.5
–
9
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
–
12
10 x 38
16
LC4-D12kk
0.870 (1.918)
4
7.5
9
9
10
–
18
10 x 38
20
LC4-D18kk
1.150 (2.535)
5.5
11
11
11
15
–
25
10 x 38
25
LC4-D25kk
1.580 (3.483)
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
14 x 51
32
LC4-D32kk
2.630 (5.798)
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
40
14 x 51
40
LC4-D40kk
2.930 (6.459)
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
22 x 58
63
LC4-D50kk
3.200 (7.054)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
65
22 x 58
80
LC4-D65kk
3.340 (7.363)
22
37
45
45
55
45
80
22 x 58
80
LC4-D80kk
3.650 (8.047)
A
10 x 38
kg (lb.)
Specifications
LC4-D09kk
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
3-pole off-load switch fuse: LC4-D09 to D80
c
Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 76 and 77).
a Coil selection
Volts
24
42
48
110
220/230
230
240
380/400
400
415
440
50/60 Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
LC4-D40kk
104
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Plate mounted starters - Dimensions and wiring diagrams
LC4D: International applications only
Plate mounted starters
LC4-D09, D12, D18, D25
LC4-D32
119
4xØ4.2
110
124
33
63
36
b
50
173
4xØ6.2
110
100
100
88
120
=
c
c1
=
c2 (1)
55
90
141 (1)
=
71
=
=
165
160 (2) (3)
=
86
LC4-
b
c
c1
D09, D12
218
110
123
c2
142
D18
218
115
128
147
D25
221
120
136
155
c1 with LA1-Dkkk
(1) with LA1-Dkkk
c2 with LA2-Dkk or LA3-Dkk
(2) with LA2-Dkk or LA3-Dkk
(1) + 4 mm with lead sealing kit
(3) + 4 mm with lead sealing kit
LC4-D40, D50, D65, D80
LC4-
a
b
b1
c
c1
c2
c3
G
D40
281
143
45
130
156
175
100
263
D50,
D65
281
143
45
130
156
175
178
263
D80
311
143
48
140
163
182
178
293
60
=
b
100/110
=
=
4xØ7
c1 with LA1-Dkkk
c2 with LA2-Dkk or LA3-Dkk
=
(1) + 4 mm with lead sealing kit
b1
c
Note: Dimensions are expressed in millimeters.
To calculate inches, multiply by 0.0394.
For example, 44 mm = 44(0.0394) in. = 1.734
4xØ7
=
G
c1
=
a
c2 (1)
c3
Plate mounted starters
LC4-D09 to D25
Q1/2
LC4-D32 to D80
Q1/2
13
– Q1
13
9
– F1
– Q1
95 14
6
5
6
95 14
4
4
– Q1
13
13
14
14
– KM1
N
A2
– KM1
Q1/6
Q1/6
A1
A1
Commande
à distance
14
13
13
6
N
– KM1
14
5
Commande
à distance
W
3
4
2
U
V
1
– KM1
96
96
2
1
3
2
– Q1
– KM1
A2
0
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
LC4-D09 to D80
105
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wye-Delta starters LC3-D: International applications only
Wiring methods differ from typical North American practice.
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Standard power ratings
of squirrel cage motors
Auxiliary contacts available
on each contactor
line
KM2
delta
KM3
Star-delta
mechanical interlock
Catalog number.
Complete with code indicating
control circuit voltage a c
Weight
star
KM1
Mains voltage - delta connection
220 V
380 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kg (lb.)
Plate mounted
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
4
5.5
7.5
11
7.5
11
7.5
–
11
–
–
–
–
–
–q
–
–q
–
1
1
LC3-D12kk
11
15
18.5
30
37
18.5
25
37
55
75
22
30
37
59
75
22
–
30
–
37
–
59
–
75
–
–
–
1
1
1
–
–
1
1
1
–q
–
–q
–
–q
–
–q
–
–q
–
1
1
1
–q
–q
Without
LC3-D09kk
1.500 (3.306)
With
LC3-D09kkA64
1.530 (3.373)
Without
LC3-D12kk
1.500 (3.306)
With
LC3-D12kkA64
1.530 (3.373)
Without
LC3-D18kk
1.700 (3.748)
With
LC3-D18kkA64
1.730 (3.814)
Without
LC3-D32kk
2.000 (4.409)
With
LC3-D32kkA64
2.030 (4.475)
Without
LC3-D40kk
4.360 (9.612)
With
LC3-D40kkA64
4.500 (9.920)
Without
LC3-D50kk
4.360 (9.612)
With
LC3-D50kkA64
4.500 (9.920)
Without
LC3-D80kk
5.200 (11.464)
With
LC3-D80kkA64
5.400 (11.904)
Rail mounted (35 mm DIN rail)
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
–
–
–
–
–
1
With
LC3-K06kk
1.631 (0.740)
4
7.5
7.5
7.5
–
–
–
–
–
1
With
LC3-K09kk
1.631 (0.740)
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
4
5.5
11
15
7.5
11
18.5
25
7.5
11
22
30
7.5
–
11
–
22
–
30
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–q
–q
–q
–q
–
–
–
–
Without
LC3-D090kk
With
LC3-D090kkA64
1.500 (3.306)
1.530 (3.373)
Without
LC3-D120kk
1.500 (3.306)
With
LC3-D120kkA64
1.530 (3.373)
Without
LC3-D180kk
1.700 (3.748)
With
LC3-D180kkA64
1.730 (3.814)
Without
LC3-D320kk
2.000 (4.409)
With
LC3-D320kkA64
2.030 (4.475)
1
1
1
1
c Protection must be provided by the addition of an overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full
load rated motor current.
a Coil selection
Star-delta starters LC3-K06 and K09
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
24
36
42
48
110
127
220/230
230
230/240
Code
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
FC7
M7
P7
U7
Star-delta starters LC3-D09 to D80, LC3-D090 to D320
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
24
42
48
110
220/ 230
230
240
380/400
400
415
440
Code
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
q One auxiliary contact block type LA1-Dkkk can also be added.
106
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wye-Delta starting: International applications only
Current
This method of starting is only applicable to 3-phase motors whose delta
connection corresponds to the mains voltage and on which all 6 stator
terminals are accessible.
2.5
2
Star-delta starting should be used for motors starting on no-load or having
a low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is reduced to one third of the direct
starting torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated torque;
- the starting current in star connection is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
current.
1
1.5
★
1
2
The transition from star to delta connection must occur when the machine
has run up to speed. A too rapid build-up in load torque would cause the
stabilised run-up speed to be too low and would therefore eliminate any
advantage in this method of starting: this is the case with certain machines
whose load torque depends on its speed (a characteristic of centrifugal
machines, for example).
0.5
3
0
0
0.25
0.50
0.75
1
Speed
All star-delta starters are supplied with a special LA2-DS2 or LA2-KT2k
time delay relay which imposes a delay on the delta contactor during the
transition period in order to allow the star contactor sufficient breaking time.
1 Starting in direct delta connection
2 Starting in star connection
Torque
7
6
5
1
4
3
2
2
1
0
0
0.25
0.50
0.75
1
Speed
1 Starting in direct delta connection
2 Starting in star connection
3 Machine resistive torque
c Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.
Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a proportion of the rated torque).
107
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wye-Delta starting: International applications only
Wiring methods differ from typical North American practice
2
1d
1d
1c
1c
KM1
1a
KM3
KM2
1e
1c
1b
108
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wye-Delta starter kits: International applications only
Wiring methods differ from typical North American practice
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Contactors
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors f
Mains voltage - delta connection
Contactors (Catalog number. Complete with
code indicating control circuit voltage) a c
Component
parts (see
below)
220 V
380 V
415 V
440 V
line
delta
star
kW
kW
kW
kW
KM2
KM3
KM1
Type
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
4
7.5
7.5
7.5
LC1-D0910kk
LC1-D0901kk
LC1-D0901kk
D09
5.5
11
11
11
LC1-D1210kk
LC1-D1201kk
LC1-D0901kk
D12
11
18.5
22
22
LC1-D1810kk
LC1-D1801kk
LC1-D0901kk
D18
15
25
30
30
LC1-D3210kk
LC1-D3201kk
LC1-D1801kk
D32
18.5
37
37
37
LC1-D4011kk
LC1-D4011kk
LC1-D2501kk
D40
30
55
59
59
LC1-D5011kk
LC1-D5011kk
LC1-D4011kk
D50
37
75
75
75
LC1-D8011kk
LC1-D8011kk
LC1-D5011kk
D80
Illustration
item no.
For use on
Catalog number
D09, D12
LA9-D1217
0.180 (0.397)
D18
LA9-D1817
0.190 (0.419)
D32
LA9-D3217
0.310 (0.683)
D40
LA9-D4017
0.380 (0.838)
D50
LA9-D5017
0.480 (1.058)
D80
LA9-D8017
0.680 (1.499)
D09, D12, D18
LA9-D12974
0.150 (0.331)
D32
LA9-D32974
0.180 (0.397)
D40 and D50
LA9-D40973
0.300 (0.661)
D80
LA9-D80973
0.300 (0.661)
Component parts
Description
(p.101)
Assembly kit comprising:
- 1 instantaneous auxiliary contact block LA1-DN11 (D09 to D40).
1a
- 1 time delay contact block LA2-DS2 (D09 to D80).
1b
- power circuit connections (D09 to D80).
1c
- screws and clamps for fixing contactors to mounting plate (D40 to D80).
1d
- terminal block (D09 to D32).
1e
Equipment mounting plate
2
Weight
kg (lb.)
c Protection must be provided by the addition of an overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages
76 and 77.
a See page 106.
q For mounting, assembly and cabling: refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment.
109
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wye-Delta starters – Wiring diagrams
LE3-D: International applications only
4
6
3
5
6
4
W1
V2
W2
2
5
6
U1
3
U2
1
4
2
6
W1
2
4
V1
U1
– KM1
1
– KM3
– KM2
2
3
6
5
5
4
3
1
2
1
– Q1
V1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Wye-delta starters with isolator
LE3-D096 to D806
6
4
W2
V2
U2
2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation
(standard motor viewed from shaft end).
110
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Wye-delta starters with isolator
LE3-D186 to D806
LE3-D096 to D126
Q1/2
9
13
Q1
13
Q1/2 0
– F1
Q1
96
21 96
95 14
95 14
Q1
O
53 14
(13)
14
53 14
55 54
(14)
68
55 54
68
18
– KM2
– KM2
21 67
– KM1
Q1/6
– KM1
A1
N
– KM2
– KM3
A2
A2
– KM3
A2
A1
– KM2
A2
– KM1
A1 22
21 56
– KM3
A1 22
– KM1
A1 22
– KM3
A1 22
21 67
– KM2
21 56
– KM2
A2
Q1/6
– KM2
– KM1
– KM1
N
13
13 22
l
– KM2
A2
l
13
17
– S1
( ) for LE3-D506, D806.
111
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Enclosed IEC non-combination starters
D-line in metal enclosures
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
E163364
CCN NKJH
CCN NKJH7
LR105 062
3211 08
D-line enclosed full voltage starters are available in Type 1 and Type 12/3R enclosures through 50 hp at 460V. The enclosed D-line uses LC1-D
contactors and LR2-D overload relays and accepts standard D-line accessories and all Insta-kit pilot device and control power transformer kits.
Enclosed full voltage non-reversing startersa
1 Phase
115
0.5
1
1
1.5
2
3
3
5
5
230
1
2
3
3
5
5
7.5
10
10
Max. Horsepower Ratings (AC3)
3 Phase
200V
230V
2
2
3
3
5
5
5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
15
15
20
20
20
Auxiliary Contacts
460V
5
7.5
10
15
20
30
30
40
50
575V
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
N.O.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
N.C.
1
1
1
1
Catalog Number c a
Weight
Catalog Number c a
Weight
Type 1
LE1--UD0936kk
LE1-UD1236kk
LE1-UD1836kk
LE1-UD2536kk
LE1-UD3236kk
LE1-UD4036kk
LE1-UD5036kk
LE1-UD6536kk
LE1-UD8036kk
lb.
6.90
6.90
6.93
7.28
9.58
11.41
11.41
16.48
16.83
Type12/3R
LE1-UD0937kk
LE1-UD1237kk
LE1-UD1837kk
LE1-UD2537kk
LE1-UD3237kk
LE1-UD4037kk
LE1-UD5037kk
LE1-UD6537kk
LE1-UD8037kk
lb.
7.70
7.70
7.73
8.08
10.44
12.27
12.27
17.44
17.79
c Substitue “S” in place of “1” in catalog number for single phase devices. Ex: LES-UD0936k
Enclosed full voltage reversing startersa
Max. Horsepower Ratings (AC3): 3 Phase
230V
460V
2
5
3
7.5
5
10
7.5
15
10
20
10
30
15
30
20
40
20
50
200V
2
3
5
5
7.5
10
10
15
20
Auxiliary Contacts
N.O.
N.C.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
575V
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
Catalog Number
Type 1
LE2-UD0936kk
LE2-UD1236kk
LE2-UD1836kk
LE2-UD2536kk
LE2-UD3236kk
LE2-UD4036kk
LE2-UD5036kk
LE2-UD6536kk
LE2-UD8036kk
Weight
lb.
9.93
9.96
10.08
-
Catalog Number
Type12/3R
LE2-UD0937kk
LE2-UD1237kk
LE2-UD1837kk
LE2-UD2537kk
LE2-UD3237kk
LE2-UD4037kk
LE2-UD5037kk
LE2-UD6537kk
LE2-UD8037kk
Weight
lb.
10.82
10.82
10.94
-
Coil voltages for enclosed non-combination starters
a Coil selection
Volts
50Hz
60Hz
50/60Hz
24
B5
B5
B7
110
F5
F6
F7
120
G6
-
127
G5
-
208
L6
-
220
M5
M6
M7
240
U5
U6
U7
277
W6
-
380
Q5
Q6
Q7
415
N5
N7
440
R5
R6
R7
480
T6
-
575
S6
-
600
X6
-
a Bimetallic overload relay must be ordered separately. See Page 107 for thermal overload relay tables.
See Pages 42 to 49 for a complete selection of D-line accessories.
See Page 116 for Insta-Kit™ accessories.
How to order:
To order specify
Catalog number
- Type number
- Coil voltage code
- Insta-Kits™
- Overload relays
Type
LE1-UD0936
Coil code
F7
Insta-kits form
AP2
Overload relay (separate item)
LR2-D1305
112
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Enclosed IEC non-combination starters
Overload relays for non-combination starters
Motor full load current range Amperes
LE1-UD
non-combination starter
.10-.16
.06-.25
.25-.40
.40-.63
.63-1
1-1.6
1.6-2.5
2.5-4
4-6
5.5-8
7-10
9-12
12-17.5
17-22
17-25
23-28
23-30
30-37
37-40
37-48
48-56
55-63
63-65
For direct mounting under
Contactor LE1/LE2
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
DO9-D32
D12-D32
D12-D32
D25
D32
D32
D40-80
D40-80
D40
D50-80
D65-80
D80
D80
Class 10 Catalog number
Class 20 Catalog number
LR2D1301
LR2D1302
LR2D1303
LR2D1304
LR2D1305
LR2D1306
LR2D1307
LR2D1308
LR2D1310
LR2D1312
LR2D1314
LR2D1316
LR2D1321
LR2D1322
LR2D1322
LR2D2353
LR2D3353
LR2D3355
LR2D3357
LR2D3357
LR2D3359
LR2D3361
LR2D3363
LR2D1508
LR2D1510
LR2D1512
LR2D1514
LR2D1516
LR2D1521
LR2D1522
LR2D1522
LR2D2553
LR2D3553
LR2D3555
LR2D3557
LR2D3557
LR2D3559
LR2D3561
LR2D3563
113
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Enclosed IEC combination starters
D-Line in metal enclosure with fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker
Horsepower ratings for North American applications
E163364
NKJH
NKJH7
LR105062
3211 08
IEC combination starters combine the requirements of motor overload and short circuit protection in one convenient compact package. All devices
provide Type 2 Coordination through 30 hp at 460V. Devices are available in Type 1 and Type 12/3R enclosures. The IEC combination starter line
accepts standard D-line accessories and all Insta-kit pilot device and control power transformer kits. Standard capacity control power transformers
with built-in fuse block can be installed in the standard enclosure.
Enclosed full voltage non-reversing fusible combination startersa
Max. Horse Power Ratings (AC3)
3 Phase
200V
230V
460V
575V
2
2
5
7.5
3
3
7.5
10
5
5
10
15
5
7.5
15
20
7.5
10
20
25
10
10
30
30
Fuse Clip Rating
Amperes
30A
30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
UL Class
CC
CC
J
J
J
J
Auxiliary
Contacts
Catalog Number c
Weight
Catalog Number c
Weight
N.O.
1
1
1
1
1
1
TYPE 1
LE1-UD0986kk
LE1-UD1286kk
LE1-UD1886kk
LE1-UD2586kk
LE1-UD3286kk
LE1-UD4086kk
lb.
18
18
18
18
26
28
Type 12/3R
LE1-UD0987kk
LE1-UD1287kk
LE1-UD1887kk
LE1-UD2587kk
LE1-UD3287kk
LE1-UD4087kk
lb.
18
18
18
18
26
28
Auxiliary
Contacts
Catalog Number c
Weight
Catalog Number c
Weight
N.O.
2
2
2
2
2
2
TYPE 1
LE2-UD0986kk
LE2-UD1286kk
LE2-UD1886kk
LE2-UD2586kk
LE2-UD3286kk
LE2-UD4086kk
lb.
26
26
26
26
27
31
Type 12/3R
LE2-UD0987kk
LE2-UD1287kk
LE2-UD1887kk
LE2-UD2587kk
LE2-UD3287kk
LE2-UD4087kk
lb.
26
26
26
26
27
31
N.C.
1
Enclosed full voltage reversing fusible combination startersa
Max. Horse Power Ratings (AC3)
3 Phase
200V
230V
460V
575V
2
2
5
7.5
3
3
7.5
10
5
5
10
15
5
7.5
15
20
7.5
10
20
25
10
10
30
30
Fuse Clip Rating
Amperes
30A
30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
UL Class
CC
CC
J
J
J
J
N.C.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Enclosed full voltage non-reversing circuit breaker combination startersa
Max. Horse Power Ratings (AC3)
3 Phase
200V
2
3
5
5
7.5
10
230V
2
3
5
7.5
10
10
Auxiliary Contacts
460V
5
7.5
10
15
20
30
575V
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
N.O.
1
1
1
1
1
1
N.C.
1
Maximum
Current Rating
Circuit Breaking
15A
15A
30A
30A
50A
50A
Catalog Number c
Weight
Catalog Number c
Weight
TYPE 1
LE1-UD0996kk
LE1-UD1296kk
LE1-UD1896kk
LE1-UD2596kk
LE1-UD3296kk
LE1-UD4096kk
lb.
20
20
20
20
27
29
Type 12/3R
LE1-UD0997kk
LE1-UD1297kk
LE1-UD1897kk
LE1-UD2597kk
LE1-UD3297kk
LE1-UD4097kk
lb.
20
20
20
20
27
29
Catalog Number c
Weight
Catalog Number c
Weight
TYPE 1
LE2-UD0996kk
LE2-UD1296kk
LE2-UD1896kk
LE2-UD2596kk
LE2-UD3296kk
LE2-UD4096kk
lb.
24
24
28
28
28
32
Type 12/3R
LE2-UD0997kk
LE2-UD1297kk
LE2-UD1897kk
LE2-UD2597kk
LE2-UD3297kk
LE2-UD4097kk
lb.
24
24
28
28
28
32
Enclosed full voltage reversing circuit breaker combination startersa
Max. Horse Power Ratings (AC3)
3 Phase
200V
230V
460V
2
2
5
3
3
7.5
5
5
10
5
7.5
15
7.5
10
20
10
10
30
Auxiliary Contacts
575V
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
N.O.
2
2
2
2
2
2
N.C.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Maximum
Current Rating
Circuit Breaking
15A
15A
30A
30A
50A
50A
aCoil selection
Volts
50Hz
60Hz
50/60Hz
24
B5
B6
B7
110
F5
F6
F7
120
G6
127
G5
208
L6
220
M5
M6
M7
240
U5
U6
U7
277
W6
380
Q5
Q6
Q7
415
N5
N7
440
R5
R6
R7
480
575
600
T6
S6
X6
How to order:
To order specify
- Type number
- Coil voltage code
- Insta-Kits™
- Overload relays
Catalog number
Type
LE1-UD0986
Coil Code
F7
Insta-kits form
AP2
Overload relay (separate item)
LR2-D1305
c Thermal overload relay must be ordered separately. See page 115 for selection.
a Bimetallic overload relay must be ordered separately. See page 115 for selection.
See pages 42 to 49 for a complete selection of D-Line accessories.
See page 116 for Insta-Kit™ accessories.
114
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Enclosed IEC combination starters
Overload relays for combination starters with fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker
LE1-UD enclosed
combination starters
Current Setting Range
Amperes
.10 - .16
.16 - .25
.25 - .40
.40 - .63
.63 - 1
1 - 1.6
1.25 - 2
1.6 - 2.5
2.5 - 4
4-6
5.5 - 8
7-9
9 - 12
12 - 17.5
17 - 22
17 - 25
23 - 28
23 - 30
30 - 37
37 - 40
For Direct Mounting under Contactor LC1/LC2
Fusible
Circuit Breaker
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
—
D09-D25
D09-D12
D09-D25
D09-D12
D09-D25
D09-D12
D12-D25
D12
D18-D25
D18-D25
D25
D25
D32
D32
D32
D32
D40
D40
D40
D40
D40
D40
Class 10 Catalog Number
Class 20 Catalog Number
LR2-D1301
LR2-D1302
LR2-D1303
LR2-D1304
LR2-D1305
LR2-D1306
LR2-D1306
LR2-D1307
LR2-D1308
LR2-D1310
LR2-D1312
LR2-D1314
LR2-D1316
LR2-D1321
LR2-D1322
LR2-D1322
LR2-D2353
LR2-D3353
LR2-D3355
LR2-D3357
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LR2-D1508
LR2-D1510
LR2-D1512
LR2-D1514
LR2-D1516
LR2-D1521
LR2-D1522
LR2-D1522
LR2-D2553
LR2-D3553
LR2-D3555
LR2-D3557
115
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Enclosed IEC combination starters – Insta-Kits™
Insta-Kits prewired prewired pilot device kits and control power transformer kits can be factory installed by selecting the factory
modification form number or installed by the customer by selecting the Insta-Kits™ reference number as a separate item.
E61239
CCN XPTQ
CCN XPTQ7
LA9FF4TK
All others
E14839
CCN NKCR
CCN NKCR7
LR105 062
3211 02
Insta-Kits™ Selection
Description
On/Off Selector Switch
Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch
Green Pilot Light (120V)
Red Pilot Light (120V)
Green Transformer Pilot Light
Red Transformer Pilot Light
Start/Stop Pushbutton
Start/Stop (Mushroom Head) Pushbutton
I/O (Start/Stop) Pushbutton
On/Off Selector Switch with Green Pilot Light (120V)
On/Off Selector Switch with Red Pilot Light (120V)
Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch with Green Pilot Light
Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch with Red Pilot Light
H-O-A Selector Switch with Green Transformer Pilot Light
H-O-A Selector Switch with Red Transformer Pilot Light
Forward-Reverse-Stop Pushbuttons
Start/Stop Pushbutton with Green Pilot Light (120V)
Start/Stop Pushbutton with Red Pilot Light (120V)
Start/Stop Pushbutton with Green Transformer Pilot Light
Start/Stop Pushbutton with Red Transformer Pilot Light
Standard Control Transformer with Top Mounted Fuse Block:
50 VA Transformer 480/240V-120V
50 VA Transformer 208-120V
100 VA Transformer 480/240V-120V
100 VA Transformer 208-120V
150 VA Transformer 480/240V-120V
150 VA Transformer 208-120V
Local/Remote Adapter - Three Wire c
Local/Remote Adapter - Four Wire c
Local/Remote Adapter - Five Wire c
Local/Remote Adapter - Seven Wire c
Kit for Remote
Factory Modification
Form
C6
C
P2 c
P1 c
P52 c
P51 c
A
A22
A6
C6P2
C6P1
CP2
CP1
CP52
CP51
A1
AP2
AP1
AP52
AP51
Insta-Kit
Catalog Number
LA9-C6
LA9-C
LA9-P12 c
LA9-P12 c
LA9-P5152* ac
LA9-P5152* ac
LA9-A
LA9-A2
—
LA9-C6P12
LA9-C6P12
LA9-CP12
LA9-CP12
LA9-CP5152* a
LA9-CP5152* a
LA9-A1
LA9-AP12
LA9-AP12
LA9-AP5152* a
LA9-AP5152* a
FF4T
FF4T
FF4T10
FF4T10
FF4T11
FF4T11
—
—
—
—
—
LA9-FF4TKF50D1
LA9-FF4TKF50D3
LA9-FF4TKF100D1
LA9-FF4TKF100D3
LA9-FF4TKF150D1
LA9-FF4TKF150D3
LA9-3W
LA9-4W
LA9-5W
LA9-7W
LA9-FK
a Replace (*) with the suffix letter corresponding to the pilot light voltage.
Voltage
Suffix Letter
24V
B
120V
K
208/240V
P
480V
W
For factory modification, add form number to the end of the catalog number.
k LA93W required when START/STOP pushbutton remote station is used in conjunction with START/STOP local control OR if local pilot light only is used.
k LA94W required when FOR/REV/STOP is required for both local and remote control.
k LA95W required when START/STOP pushbutton with pilot light remote station OR pilot light oly remote is used with START/STOP pushbutton local control.
k LA97W required for remote control only applications.
Insta-Kits™ shown with LE1-UD non-combination starter
Insta-Kits™ is a trademark of Schneider Canada.
116
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Approximate dimensions – Enclosed combination and non-combination IEC starters
Combination starter dimensions
Dimensions in inches
Type 1
10"
2 1/2"
5"
8"
7 1/2"
2 1/2"
3"
12 1/2 "
14"
16 1/2 "
18 "
7 1/2"
Provision for 1/4" screw
Provision for 1/4" screw
D09-D25 FVNR
D09-D25 FVR
D32-D40 FVNR and FVR
Type 12/3R
10"
2 1/2"
5"
7 3/4"
3/8"
8"
2 1/2"
3"
7 3/4"
18 "
7/8 "
18
14"
19
15 5/8"
14 7/8"
5/8 "
3/8"
7/16"
Provision for 1/4" screw
7/16"
Provision for 1/4" screw
D09-D25 FVNR
D09-D25 FVR
D32-D40 FVNR and FVR
Non-combination starter dimensions
Dimensions shown in inches
.50
A
J
.75
E
B
K
C
R
F
G
H
.56
D/2
D
PROVISION FOR 1/4" SCREW
TYPE 1
Non-reversing
Reversing
D09-25
–
D32-50
D65-80
A
TYPE 12/3R
B
C
D
6.77
10.04
6.25
5.38
D09-32
8.66
10.83
7.21
D40-80
10.63
13.98
7.21
E
F
G
H
J
K
D
E
9.00
1-11/4
–
1-1/4
11.37
9.75
11/4-11/2
1-11/4
1-1/4
5.38
12.15
9.22
12.94
11/4-11/2
1-11/4
1-11/4
1/ - 3/
2
4
1/ - 3/
2
4
1/ - 3/
2
4
5.38
7.25
1/ -3/
2 4
1/ -3/
2 4
1/ -3/
2 4
5.38
15.30
Type 1 enclosures include conduit knockouts indicated by F, G, H, J and K diameter dimensions.
Type 12/3R enclosures do not include conduit knockouts.
For additional information on combination starters, reference catalog number 9502HO9601.
For additional information on non-combination starters, reference catalog number 9502HO9402.
117
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Schemes – Enclosed IEC non-combination starters
Non-reversing, non-combination 3-phase starter
LE1-UDkk36 and LE1-UDkk37
GND
A2
A1
L1
L2
L3
21
13
M
A3
T1
T2
T3
22
8
4
5
6
1
2
3
9
14
Insta-Kit
Harness
Receptacle
D40
Only
95
97
7
OL
ALARM
98
T1
T2
T3
96
Non-reversing, non-combination 1-phase starter
LES-UDkk36 and LES-UDkk37
GND
A2
A1
L1
L2
L3
21
13
M
A3
T1
T2
T3
22
8
4
5
6
1
2
3
9
14
D40
Only
95
97
7
Insta-Kit
Harness
Receptacle
OL
ALARM
98
T1
T2
T3
96
Reversing, non-combination 3-phase starter
LE2-UDkk36 and LE2-UDkk37
Insta-Kit
Harness
Receptacle
GND
A2
A1
FWD
L1
L2
L3
O2
A2
A1
13
REV
L1
L2
L3
O2
13
F
F
A3
T1
T2
T3
O1
14
FWD
FWD
REV
A3
T1
T2
T3
O1
7
8
4
5
6
1
2
3
9
14
REV
95
97
ALARM
OL
98
T1
T2
T3
96
118
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Schemes – Enclosed IEC combination starters
Non-reversing, combination 3-phase starter
LE1-UDkk86 and LE1-UDkk87, 97
L2
L1
L3
Disconnecting Means
T1
T2
T3
L1
L2
L3
21
13
T1
T2
T3
22
14
GND
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
A2
A1
FWD
F
A3
FWD
Insta-Kit
Harness
Receptacle
95
97
D40
Only
OL
Alarm
T1
98
T3
T2
96
Reversing, combination 3-phase starter
LE2-UDkk86, 96 and LE2-UDkk87, 97
L1
L2
L3
Disconnecting Means
A2
A1
REV
T1
T2
T3
L1
L2
L3
O2
13
A2
A1
L1
L2
L3
O2
13
T1
T2
T3
O1
14
FWD
F
R
A3
T1
REV
T2
T3
O1
14
FWD
A3
33
37
GND
OL
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
38
T1
T2
T3
16
Insta-Kit
Harness
Receptacle
119
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Enclosed contactors LE1-D
International applications only
Contains UL listed, CSA certified and CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
Operational
current 440 V
up to
220/230 V
380/400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660/690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
1.5
2.2
2.2
3
–
–
6
Type of
enclosure
Basic reference.
Complete with code
indicating control
circuit voltage a
LE1-K064kk
Weight
kg (lb)
0.55 (1.212)
Protected
LE1-K064kkA32
0.92 (2.028)
LE1-K065kk
0.55 (1.212)
Sealed
2.2 f
4
4
4
–
–
9
LE1-K065kkA32
0.92 (2.028)
LE1-K094kk
0.55 (1.212)
Protected
LE1-K094kkA32
0.92 (2.028)
LE1-K095kk
0.55 (1.212)
Sealed
2.2 f
4
4
4
5.5
5.5
9
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
12
4
7.5
9
9
10
10
18
5.5
11
11
11
15
15
25
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
Protected
LE1-D093kk
LE1-K095kkA32
0.92 (2.028)
LE1-D094kk
0.55 (1.212)
Sealed
LE1-D093kk
0.92 (2.028)
Protected
LE1-D124kk
0.55 (1.212)
Sealed
LE1-D123kk
0.92 (2.028)
Protected
LE1-D188kk
0.995 (2.193)
Sealed
LE1-D185kk
1.015 (2.238)
Protected
LE1-D258kk
0.995 (2.193)
Sealed
LE1-D255kk
1.015 (2.238)
Sealed
LE1-D325kk
4.32 (9.524)
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
40
Sealed
LE1-D405kk
4.82 (10.626)
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
Sealed
LE1-D505kk
4.85 (10.692)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
65
Sealed
LE1-D655kk
4.85 (10.692)
22
37
45
45
55
45
80
Sealed
LE1-D805kk
5.14 (11.332)
25
45
45
45
55
45
95
Sealed
LE1-D955kk
5.44 (11.993)
Specifications
Enclosure
LE1-K06 and K09
Double insulated enclosure, IP 659, l:
80 mm
LE1-K06kkkA32, LE1-K09kkkA32
Double insulated enclosure, IP 659, l:
175 mm
LE1-D09 and D12
Double insulated enclosure, IP 659
LE1-D18 and D25
Double insulated enclosure, IP 557
LE1-D32 to D95
Metal enclosure, IP 559
Control by 2 pushbuttons
mounted on enclosure cover
LE1-K06 and K09, LE1-D09 to D95
1 green Start button “I”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
Connections
LE1-D09 to D95
Pre-wired power circuit connections
c Overload protection by thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
a Coil selection
LE1-D405kk
LE1-K
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
12
24
36
42
48
110
127
220/230
230
230/240
380/400
400
400/415
440
500
660/690
Code
J7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
FC7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7
Y7
LE1-D
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
24
42
48
110
220/230
230
240
380/400
400
415
440
Code
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
Other voltages: LE1-K and LE1-D please consult your Regional Sales Office.
120
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Enclosed contactors LE1-D
Forms (mounted by Telemecanique)
Description
For use on
Suffix to be added to starter reference a
No pushbuttons on cover
LE1-D09 to D95
A04
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE1-D09 to D95
A05
1 3-position selector switch (“I”-“O”-“II”)
(“I”: Automatic Start; “O”: Stop; “II”: Manual start)
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE1-D09 and D12
A09
1 2-position selector switch “O”-“I”
(“O”: Stop; “I”: Manual Start)
1 blue Reset button "R”
LE1-D09 and D12
A13
Knock-outs for 4 x 16P cable glands
(instead of 4 x 13P)
LE1-D09 and D12
A20
1 green Start button “I”
1 red Stop button “O”
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE1-D09 and D12
A35
Special device for control of compressor and vacuum valve
(no-load starting). Maintained control.
Limits the IP rating to 42 only.
LE1-D09 to D25
A40
1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on starters ordered
with 240 V (U7) control supply.
LE1-K06 and K09
LE1-D09 to D95
A59
Description
For use on
Reference
Weight
kg (lb.)
Start button latching device for stay-put operation
(Start-Stop)
LE1-D18 to D65
LA9-D09907
0.060 (0.132)
LE1-D09 and D12
LA9-D931
0.040 (0.088)
LE1-D18 and D25
LA9-D941
0.025 (0.055)
110 V
LE1-D09 to D25
LA9-D924
0.020 (0.044)
220 V
LE1-D09 to D25
LA9-D925
0.020 (0.044)
380, 415 V
LE1-D09 to D25
LA9-D926
0.020 (0.044)
LE1-D09 to D95
LA1-DNii
0.030 (0.066)
Accessories (mounted by the customer)
Miniature control circuit fuse holder
size 5 x 20
4 A/250 V
Fuse supplied
Pilot light with neon bulb
red lens and locking ring
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts
a Example: LE1-D093F7A04.
121
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Enclosed contactors with fused disconnect switch LE4-K and LE4-D
International applications only
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
LE4-K065kk
Operational
current
Fuses to be fitted
by the customer
Size
220/230 V
380/400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660/690 V
440 V
up to
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
1.5
2.2
2.2
3
–
–
6
10 x 38
10
2.2
4
4
4
–
–
9
10 x 38
12
2.2
4
4
4
5.5
–
Basic reference.
Complete with
code indicating
control circuit
voltage a
Weight
LE4-K065kk
1.450 (3.197)
LE4-K095kk
1.450 (3.197)
Type
aM
A
9
10 x 38
lb (kg)
12
LE4-D096kk q
1.960 (4.321)
LE4-D096kk
1.960 (4.321)
1.960 (4.321)
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
–
12
10 x 38
16
LE4-D126kk
4
7.5
9
9
10
–
18
10 x 38
20
LE4-D186kk
2.200 (4.850)
5.5
11
11
11
15
–
25
10 x 38
25
LE4-D256kk
2.200 (4.850)
5.190 (11.442)
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
14 x 51
32
LE4-D326kk
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
40
14 x 51
40
LE4-D406kk
5.770 (12.720)
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
22 x 58
63
LE4-D506kk
6.440 (14.198)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
65
22 x 58
80
LE4-D656kk
6.670 (14.705)
22
37
45
45
55
45
80
22 x 58
80
LE4-D806kk f
7.100 (15.653)
Specifications
LE4-K06, K09
Double insulated enclosure, IP 659
LE4-D09 to D25
Double insulated enclosure, IP 557
LE4-D32 to D80
Metal enclosure, IP 559
Control by 2 pushbuttons
mounted on enclosure cover
LE4-K06, K09
LE4-D09 to D65
1 green Start button “I”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
No pushbuttons on cover
LE4-D80
–
LE4-K06, K09
1 3-pole isolator
LE4-D09 to D25
1 3-pole isolator + 1 additional pole LA8-D254
LE4-D32 to D80
1 3-pole isolator and 1 circuit breaker GB2-CB08
LE4-K06, K09
LE4-D09 to D80
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections.
Enclosure
Isolator with external operator
Connections
LE4-D096kk
c Overload protection by thermal overload relay to be ordered separately.
a Coil selection
LE4-K
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
12
24
36
42
48
110
127
220/230
230
230/240
380/400
400
400/415
440
500
660/690
Code
J7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
FC7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7
Y7
LE4-D
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
24
42
48
110
220/230
230
240
380/400
400
415
440
Code
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
Other voltages: LE4-K and LE4-D, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
q Selected according to overall dimensions and number of operating cycles .
f Supplied with 3 entries.
LE4-D406kk
122
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Enclosed contactors with fused disconnect switch LE4-K and LE4-D
International applications only
Forms (mounted by Telemecanique)
Description
For use on
Suffix to be added to starter reference a
No pushbuttons on cover
LE4-D09 to D65
A04
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE4-D09 to D80
A05
Special device for control of compressor and
vacuum valve (no-load starting). Maintained
control. Limits IP rating to 42 only.
LE4-D09 to D25
A40
1 neutral terminal. Fitted as standard on starters
ordered with 240 V (U7) control supply.
LE4-K06 and K09
LE4-D09 to D80
A59
Description
For use on
Catalog number
Weight
kg (lb.)
Start button latching device
for stay-put operation (Start-Stop)
LE4-D09 to D65
LA9-D09907
0.060 (0.135)
Miniature control circuit fuse holder
size 5 x 20,
4 A/250 V
Fuse supplied
LE4-D09 to D25
LA9-D941
0.025 (0.056)
110 V
LE4-D09 to D25
LA9-D924
0.020 (0.045)
220 V
LE4-D09 to D25
LA9-D925
0.020 (0.045)
380, 415 V
LE4-D09 to D25
LA9-D926
0.020 (0.045)
LE4-D09 to D95
LA1-DNkk
0.030 (0.067)
Accessories (mounted by the customer)
Pilot light with neon bulb
red lens and locking ring
1 front-mounting block of
2 auxiliary contacts
a Example: LE4-D096F7A04.
123
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Enclosed starters LE1-D
International applications only
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified
LE1-D123
Operational
current up to
Minimum c.s.a. of
phase conductors
Fuses to be fitted separately
For use with
relay LR2-D
or kit LA9-D
(to be ordered
separately)
Basic reference.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
aM
gI
A
mm2
A
A
16
2.5
–
16
LA9-D1275 f
LE1-D123kk
17.5
1.5
0.920 (2.064)
20
–
LR2-D1321 q
LE1-D123kk
24
0.920 (2.064)
2.5
25
–
LR2-D1322 q
LE1-D255kk
1.015 (2.278)
32
6
–
32
LA9-D0975 f
LE1-D255kk
1.015 (2.278)
50
10
–
50
–
LE1-D405kkA04 t
4.820 (10.816
57
10
63
–
LR2-D3359 q
LE1-D405kk
4.820 (10.816)
63
16
–
63
–
LE1-D655kkA04 t
4.850 (10.883)
76
16
80
–
LR2-D3363 q
LE1-D655kk
4.850 (10.883
90
25
100
–
LR2-D3365 q
LE1-D805kk
5.140 (11.534)
100
35
–
100
–
LE1-D805kkA04 t
5.140 (11.534)
Weight
kg (lb.)
Specifications
Enclosure
Control (2 pushbuttons
mounted on enclosure cover)
LE1-D12
Double insulated, degree of protection IP 659
LE1-D25
Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557
LE1-D40 to D80
Metal, degree of protection IP 559
LE1-D12 to D80
1 green Start button “I”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
No pushbuttons on cover
LE1-DkkkkkA04
Connections
LE1-D12 to D80
Pre-wired control circuit connections
c 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V or 415 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, in cable racks or ducting,
laid singly, ambient temperature ≤ 95 °F ( 35 °C), conforming to NF C 15-100.
a Control circuit voltage 220/230 V 50/60 Hz (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7).
q Order the required LR2-D thermal overload relay separately. For use on balanced circuits only.
f As protection is provided by type gI fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM type fuses are used) can
be obtained by means of kit LA9-Dkk75.
t Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.
LE1-D405
124
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Enclosed starters LE1-D
International applications only
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Forms (mounted by Telemecanique)
Description
For use on
Suffix to be added to the reference q
No pushbuttons on cover
LE1-D12 & D25
A04
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE1-D12 to D80
A05
1 green Start button “I” and 1 red Stop button "O”
with 1 N.C. contact (for distribution circuits
without thermal overload relay)
LE1-D12 & D25
A07
1 2-position selector switch "O-I”
("O”: Stop ; "I”: Manual Start)
1 blue Reset button "R”
LE1-D12
A13
Knock-outs for 4 x 16 mm plastic cable glands
(instead of 4 x 13 plastic glands)
LE1-D12
A20
1 neutral terminal (3-phase + N circuits)
LE1-D12 to D80
A59
For use on
Unit reference
Accessories (mounted by the customer)
Description
Weight
kg (lb.)
Start button latching device for stay put operation
(Start-Stop)
LA9-D09907
0.060 (0.132)
LE1-D12
LA9-D1275
0.040 (0.088)
LE1-D25
LA9-D0975
0.020 (0.044)
LE1-D12
LA9-D931
0.040 (0.088)
LE1-D25
LA9-D941
0.025 (0.055)
110 V
LE1-D12 & D25
LA9-D924
0.020 (0.044)
220 V
LE1-D12 & D25
LA9-D925
0.020 (0.044)
380, 415 V
LE1-D12 & D25
LA9-D926
0.020 (0.044)
LE1-D12 to D80
LA1-DNkk
0.030 (0.066)
Kits to provide stop function
without thermal overload relay fitted
Miniature control circuit fuse holder
size 5 x 20
A 4/250 V
Fuse supplied
Pilot light with neon bulb,
red lens and locking ring
LE1-D25 to D65
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts
(see page ????)
c 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly,
ambient temperature ≤ 95 °F (35 °C), conforming to NF C 15-100.
a Order LR2-D thermal overload relay separately. For use on balanced circuits only.
q Example: LE1-D123M7A04.
125
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Enclosed starters with fused disconnect switch LE4-D
International applications only
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Operational
current up to
Minimum c.s.a.
of phase
conductors
A
mm2
16
2.5
17.5
Fuses to be fitted by customer
Size
Type
For use with relay LR2D or kit LA9-D (to be
ordered separately)
Basic reference.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
Weight
aM
gI
A
A
10 x 38
–
16
LA9-D0975 f
LE4-D126kk
1.960 (4.321)
1.5
10 x 38
20
–
LR2-D1321 q
LE4-D126kk
1.960 (4.321)
20
2.5
10 x 38
–
20
LA9-D0975 f
LE4-D256kk
2.200 (4.850)
22
2.5
10 x 38
25
–
LR2-D1322 q
LE4-D256kk
2.200 (4.850)
40
10
14 x 51
–
40
–
LE4-D406kkA04 t
5.770 (12.720)
45
10
14 x 51
50
–
LR2-D3357 q
LE4-D406kk
5.770 (12.720)
63
16
22 x 58
–
63
–
LE4-D656kkA04 t
6.670 (14.704)
76
16
22 x 58
80
–
LR2-D3363 q
LE4-D656kk
6.670 (14.704)
90
25
22 x 58
100
–
LR2-D3365 q
LE4-D806kk t
7.100 (15.652)
100
35
22 x 58
–
100
–
LE4-D806kk t
7.100 (15.652)
kg (lb.)
Specifications
LE4-D12 and D25
Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557
LE4-D40 to D80
Metal, degree of protection IP 559
Control (2 pushbuttons
mounted on enclosure cover)
LE4-D12 to D65
1 green Start button “I”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
No pushbuttons on cover
LE4-DkkkkkA04
LE4-D80
–
Isolator with
external operator
LE4-D12 and D25
1 3-pole isolator + 1 additional pole LA8-D254
LE4-D40 to D80
1 3-pole isolator + 1 circuit breaker GB2-CB08
Connections
LE4-D12 to D80
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
Enclosure
LE4-D126kk
c 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting,
laid singly, ambient temperature ≤ 95 °F (35 °C), conforming to NF C 15-100.
a Control circuit voltage 220/230 V 50/60 Hz (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7).
q Order the required LR2-D thermal overload relay separately. For use on balanced circuits only.
f As protection is provided by type gI fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM type fuses are used) can
be obtained by means of kit LA9-D0975.
t Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.
LE4-D406
126
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
Enclosed starters with fused disconnect switch LE4-D
International applications only
Forms (mounted by Telemecanique)
Description
For use on
Suffix to be added to reference q
No pushbuttons on cover
LE4-D12 & D25
A04
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE4-D12 to D80
A05
1 green Start button “I” and 1 red Stop button “O”
with 1 N.C. contact
(for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay)
LE4-D12 & D25
A07
1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)
LE4-D12 to D80
A59
For use on
Reference
Accessories (mounted by the customer)
Weight
Description
kg (lb.)
Start button latching device for stay put operation
(Start-Stop)
LE4-D12 to D65
LA9-D09907
0.060 (0.132)
Kit to provide Stop function without
thermal overload relay fitted
LE4-D12 & D25
LA9-D0975
0.020 (0.044)
Miniature control circuit fuse holder
size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V
Fuse supplied
LE4-D12 & D25
LA9-D941
0.025 (0.055)
110 V
LE4-D12 & D25
LA9-D924
0.020 (0.044)
220 V
LE4-D12 & D25
LA9-D925
0.020 (0.044)
380, 415 V
LE4-D12 & D25
LA9-D926
0.020 (0.044)
LE4-D12 to D80
LA1-DNkk
0.030 (0.066)
Pilot light with neon bulb,
red lens and locking ring
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts
(see page ????)
c 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly,
ambient temperature ≤ 95 °F (35 °C), conforming to NF C 15-100.
a Order the required LR2-D thermal overload relay separately. For use on balanced circuits only
q Example: LE4-D126M7A04.
127
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
Enclosed reversing starters LE2-D
International applications only
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
LE2-K065
Operational
current 440 V
up to
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
1.5
2.2
2.2
3
–
–
6
2.2
4
4
4
–
–
–
–
–
–
5.5
5.5
Basic reference.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
Weight
LE2-K065kk
1.080 (2.381)
1.080 (2.381)
kg (lb.)
9
LE2-K095kk
or
LE2-D095kk q
2.100 (4.630)
9
LE2-D095kk
2.100 (4.630)
2.100 (4.630)
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
12
LE2-D125kk
4
7.5
9
9
10
10
18
LE2-D185kk
2.410 (5.313)
5.5
11
11
11
15
15
25
LE2-D255kk
2.570 (5.666)
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
LE2-D325kk
4.100 (9.039)
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
40
LE2-D405kk
5.270 (11.618)
5.470 (12.059)
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
LE2-D505kk
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
65
LE2-D655kk
5.470 (12.059)
22
37
45
45
55
45
80
LE2-D805kk
6.700 (14.771)
25
45
45
45
55
45
95
LE2-D955kk
7.000 (15.432)
Specifications
Enclosure
LE2-K065 and K095
Double insulated enclosure, IP 659
LE2-D09 to D25
Double insulated enclosure, IP 557
LE2-D32 to D95
Metal enclosure, IP 559
Control by 1 operator mounted on enclosure cover
LE2-D09 to D95
1 blue Reset button “R”
Connections
LE2-D09 to D95
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
Forms (mounted by Telemecanique)
LE2-D095
Description
For use on
Suffix to be added to starter reference t
No pushbuttons on cover
LE2-D09 to D95
A04
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE2-K06 and K09
A05
1 green Start button “I”
1 green Start button “II”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
LE2-D09 to D95
A11
1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on starters ordered with 240 V
(U7) control supply
LE2-K06 and K09
LE2-D09 to D95
A59
c Overload protection by thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
a Coil selection
LE8-K
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
12
24
36
42
48
110
127
220/230
230
230/240
380/400
400
400/415
440
500
660/690
Code
J7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
FC7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7
Y7
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
24
42
48
110
220/230
230
240
380/400
400
415
440
Code
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
LE2-D
LE2-D405
128
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Enclosed reversing starters with fused disconnect switch LE2-D
International applications only
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60Hz in category AC-3
Operational
current
Fuses to be fitted
by the customer
Basic reference.
Complete with
code indicating
control circuit
voltage a
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
440 V
up to
Size
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
1.5
2.2
2.2
3
–
–
6
10 x 38
10
LE8-K065kk
1.60 (3.527)
2.2
4
4
4
–
–
9
10 x 38
12
LE8-K095kk
1.60 (3.527)
or
LE2-D096kkq
3.55 (7.826)
Type
aM
A
kg (lb.)
–
–
–
–
5.5
–
9
10 x 38
12
LE2-D096kk
3.55 (7.826)
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
–
12
10 x 38
16
LE2-D126kk
3.55 (7.826)
4
7.5
9
9
10
–
18
10 x 38
20
LE2-D186kk
3.70 (8.157)
5.5
11
11
11
15
–
25
10 x 38
25
LE2-D256kk
4.67 (10.295)
5.80 (12.787)
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
14 x 51
32
LE2-D326kk
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
40
14 x 51
40
LE2-D406kk
14.17 (31.24)
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
22 x 58
63
LE2-D506kk
14.70 (32.41)
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
65
22 x 58
80
LE2-D656kk
14.77 (32.56)
22
37
45
45
55
45
80
22 x 58
80
LE2-D806kk
16.00 (35.27)
Specifications
LE8-K065 and K095
Double insulated enclosure, IP 659
LE2-D09 to D80
Metal enclosure, IP 559
Control by 1 operator mounted on enclosure cover
LE2-D09 to D25
1 blue Reset button “R”
No pushbuttons on cover
LE2-D32 to D80
–
LE2-D09 to D25
1 3-pole isolator
+ 1 additional pole LA8-D254
LE2-D32 to D80
1 3-pole isolator and
1 circuit breaker GB2-CB08
LE8-K06, K09
LE2-D09 to D80
Pre-wired power and control circuit
connections
Enclosure
LE2-D096
Isolator with external operator
Connections
Forms (mounted by Telemecanique)
Description
For use on
Suffix to be added to starter reference f
No pushbuttons on cover
LE2-D09 to D25
A04
LE8-K06 and K09.
1 blue Reset button “R”
A05
LE2-D32 to D80
1 green Start button “I”
1 green Start button “II”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
LE2-D09 to D80
A11
1 neutral terminal.
Fitted as standard on starters ordered
with 240 V (U7) control supply.
LE8-K06, K09
LE2-D09 to D80
A59
c Overload protection by thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
a Standard control circuit voltages, see page 130.
f Example: LE2-D096F7A04.
LE2-D406
129
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wye-Delta starters LE3-D
International applications only
Wiring methods differ from typical North American practice.
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Basic reference.
Complete with code
indicating control circuit
voltage a
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors q
Mains voltages - delta connection
220 V
380 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Weight
kg (lb.)
Maximum operating rate in starts/hour: LE3-K: 12 and LE3-D: 30. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds
3
5.5
4
5.5
7.5
5.5
7.5
LE3-K065kk
1.460 (3.219)
LE3-K095kk
1.460 (3.219)
LE3-D095kk f
3.650 (8.047)
3.650 (8.047)
7.5
or
5.5
11
11
11
LE3-D125kk
11
18.5
22
22
LE3-D185kk
3.750 (8.267)
15
25
30
30
LE3-D325kk
5.160 (11.376)
8.160 (17.989)
18.5
37
37
37
LE3-D405kk
30
55
59
59
LE3-D505kk
8.150 (17.967)
37
75
75
75
LE3-D805kk
14.000 (30.864)
Enclosure
LE3-D09 to D80
Metal, degree of protection
IP 559
Control (2 pushbuttons mounted on enclosure cover)
LE3-D09 to D18
1 green Start button “I”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
Specifications
LE3-D095
No pushbuttons on cover
LE3-D32 to D80
–
Connections
LE3-K06 and K09
LE3-D09 to D80
Pre-wired power and
control circuit connections
A timer LA2-DS2 imposes a delay of 40 ms ± 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover
to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
Forms (mounted by Telemecanique)
Description
For use on
Suffix to be added to starter reference t
No pushbuttons on cover
LE3-D09 to D18
A04
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE3-D09 to D80
A05
1 green Start button “I”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
LE3-D32 to D80
A06
1 Neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on starters ordered
with 240 V (U7) control supply
LE3-K06 and K09
LE3-D09 to D80
A59
c Overload protection by means of thermal overload relay to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 the full load rated
motor current.
a Coil selection
LE3-K
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
12
24
36
42
48
110
127
220/230
230
230/240
380/400
400
400/415
440
500
660/690
Code
J7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
FC7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7
Y7
Volts AC
50/60 Hz
24
42
48
110
220/230
230
240
380/400
400
415
440
Code
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
LE3-D
t Example: LE3-D095F7A04.
130
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Star-Delta starters with fused disconnect switch LE3-D
International applications only
Wiring methods differ from typical North American practice.
Contains UL listed, CSA certified, CE marked components.
Assemblies are not UL listed or CSA certified.
Standard power ratings
of squirrel cage motors q
Mains voltages - delta connection
Fuses to be
fitted by customer
220 V
380 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Basic reference. Complete
with code indicating control
circuit voltage a
Weight
Type
aM
Size
A
kg (lb.)
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
4
7.5
7.5
7.5
10 x 38
20
LE3-D096kk
3.900 (8.598)
5.5
11
11
11
10 x 38
25
LE3-D126kk
3.900 (8.598)
4.850 (10.692)
11
18.5
22
22
14 x 51
40
LE3-D186kk
15
25
30
30
22 x 58
63
LE3-D326kk
7.650 (16.865)
18.5
37
37
37
22 x 58
80
LE3-D406kk
16.90 (37.256)
30
55
59
59
22 x 58
125
LE3-D506kk
17.00 (37.478)
37
75
75
75
0
160
LE3-D806kk
27.50 (60.626)
Specifications
Enclosure
LE3-D09 to D80
Metal enclosure, degree of protection IP 559
Control (2 pushbuttons
on enclosure cover)
LE3-D09 and D12
1 green Start button “l”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
No pushbuttons on cover
LE3-D18 to D80
–
LE3-D09 and D12
1 3-pole isolator
+ 1 additional pole LA8-D254
LE3-D18 tp D80
1 3-pole isolator and
1 circuit breaker GB2-CB08
LE3-D09 to D80
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
LE3-D096
Isolator with external operator
Connections
A timer LA2-DS2 imposes a delay of 40 ms ± 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover
to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
Forms (mounted by Telemecanique)
Description
For use on
Suffix to be added to starter reference f
No pushbuttons on cover
LE3-D09 and D12
A04
1 blue Reset button “R”
LE3-D09 to D80
A05
1 green Start button “I”
1 red Stop/Reset button “O”
LE3-D18 to D80
A06
1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on starters ordered
with 240 V (U7) control supply.
LE3-D09 to D80
A59
c Overload protection by thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 the full load rated motor
current.
a Coil selection
Volts
24
42
48
110
220/230
230
240
380/400
400
415
440
50/60 Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
Other voltages: see replacement coil pages 24017/2 to 24017/7.
f Example: LE3-D096F7A04.
LE3-D406
131
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Spare parts and accessories
International applications only
Operating heads for Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons
Description
For use on
Unit reference
Weight
kg (lb.)
Flush green “I”
ZA2-BA331
LE1-D09 and D12
ZA2-BA331 c
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D18
LA9-D17914
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D25
LA9-D16914
0.015 (0.033)
LE4-D09, D12 and D25
LA9-D2514
0.015 (0.033)
LE4-D18
LA9-D1814
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D09 and D12
ZA2-BL432 c
0.020 (0.044)
LE1-D18
LA9-D1811
0.020 (0.044)
LE1-D25
LA9-D2511
0.020 (0.044)
LE4-D09 and D12
LA9-D0911
0.020 (0.044)
LE4-D18
LA9-D1821
0.020 (0.044)
LE4-D25
LA9-D2521
0.020 (0.044)
LE1-D09 and D12
LA9-D0910
0.040 (0.088)
LE1-D09 and D12
ZA2-BA639 a
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D18
LA9-D1818
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D25
LE2-D095 and D125
LA9-D2518
0.015 (0.033)
LE4-D09 and D12
LE2-D185
LA9-D0918
0.015 (0.033)
LE4-D18
LE2-D255
LA9-D1828
0.015 (0.033)
Projecting red “O”
ZA2-BL432
Mounting kit for heads
ZA2-BA331 and ZA2-BL432
Operating heads for Reset pushbuttons
Flush blue “R”
LA9-D0918
LE4-D25
LA9-D2528
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D09 and D12
LA9-D0935
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D09 and D12
LA9-E0906 q
0.015 (0.033)
LE2-D095 and D125
LE4-D09 and D12
LA9-D09906 f
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D18 and D25
LE2-D185 and D255
LE4-D18 and D25
LA9-D16906 q
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D09 and D12
LA9-E0975 t
0.015 (0.033)
LE1-D25
LE4-D09 to D25
LA9-D0975 t
0.020 (0.044)
LE1-D09 and D12
LA9-D0909
0.015 (0.033)
Start pushbutton latching device
for local stay put operation
LE1-D18 and D25
LE4-D18 and D25
LA9-D09907
0.025 (0.055)
Shim
LE1-D18
LA9-D1831
0.020 (0.044)
LE1-D09 and D12
LA9-E0991
0.010 (0.022)
LE1-D18 and D25
LE2-D095 to D255
LE4-D09 to D25
DE1-DS91
0.010 (0.022)
LE1 and LE4-D09 to D25
LA9-D940
0.050 (0.110)
Mounting kit for head ZA2-BA639
Contact blocks
1 N.O.
spring return
LA9-D0906
1 N.C.
spring return
Contact block support
Accessories
Enclosure sealing kit
LA9-D09906
Vacuum valve (sold in lots of 5)
c
a
q
f
t
Remember to order mounting kit LA9-D0910 (1 kit only required for both heads).
Remember to order mounting kit LA9-D0935.
Color reference green.
Color reference black.
Color reference red.
LA9-D09907
132
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Spare parts and accessories
International applications only
Empty enclosures for across-the-line starters without off-load isolator
For use with
LE1-D094, D124
Type c
Double insulated degree of
protection IP 429
LE1-D188 q
LE1-D258
Double insulated degree of
protection IP 427
LE1-D093, D123
Double insulated degree of
protection IP 659
DE1-DS513A06
LE1-D185 q
LE1-D255
Double insulated degree of
protection IP 557
Pushbutton operating
head(s) or blanking plug(s)
mounted on the cover
Reference
Without a
DE1-DS514A04 f
0.430 (0.948)
1 flush blue head “R”
DE1-DS514A05 f
0.430 (0.948)
1 flush green head “I”
1 projecting red head “O”
DE1-DS514A06 f
0.430 (0.948)
2 blanking plugs
(select 1 or 2 heads from
previous page if required)
DE1-DS618A04
0.585 (1.290)
Without a
DE1-DS513A04 f
0.430 (0.948)
1 flush blue head “R”
DE1-DS513A05 f
0.430 (0.948)
1 flush green head “I”
1 projecting red head “O”
DE1-DS513A06 f
0.430 (0.948)
2 blanking plugs
(select 1 or 2 heads from
previous page if required)
DE1-DS615A04
0.585 (1.290)
Weight
kg (lb.)
Empty enclosures for D.O.L. starters with off-load isolator
LE4-D096, D126
Double insulated degree of
protection IP 557
DE1-DS615A04
LE4-D186, D256
Double insulated degree of
protection IP 557
2 blanking plugs
DE1-DS526A04
1.330 (2.932)
1 flush blue head “R”
1 blanking plug
DE1-DS526A05
1.330 (2.932)
1 flush green head “I”
1 projecting red head “O”
DE1-DS526A06
1.330 (2.932)
2 blanking plugs
(select 1 or 2 heads from
previous page if required)
DE1-DS626A04
1.430 (3.152)
Empty enclosures for reversing starters without off-load isolator
LE2-D095, D125
LE2-D185, D255
DE1-DS526A05
Double insulated degree of
protection IP 557
Double insulated degree of
protection IP 557
2 blanking plugs
DE1-DS525A04
1.330 (2.932)
1 flush blue head “R”
1 blanking plug
DE1-DS525A05
1.330 (2.932)
1 flush green head “I”
1 flush green head “II”
1 projecting red head “O”
DE1-DS525A11
1.330 (2.932)
2 blanking plugs
(can be fitted with 1 flush
blue head “R” selected from
previous page)
DE1-DS625A04
1.430 (3.152)
c Dimensions and knock-outs for cable glands: see pages 134 to 137.
a Cover can be supplied with cut-outs for fitting 1, 2 or 3 operating heads, see page 132.
q Order shim LA9-D1831 separately: see page 132.
f Variant: to order an enclosure with 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable glands, add suffix A20 to the reference.
Example : DE1-DS513A06A20.
DE1-DS525A11
133
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions
LEkD: International applications only
Enclosed D-Line starters without Fused Disconnect Switch
LE1-D093, D123
LE1-D094, D124
LE1-D185, D255
LE1-D188, D258
LE1-D325, D405, D505, D655
LE3-D095, D125, D185
=
=
2xØ5.5
=
2xØ5.5
= =
195
312
165
=
=
142
=
=
135
88
=
120
140
185
150
166
4xØ7.7
101
150
=
161 (1)
105
=
181
(1) 150 for LE1-DkkkkkA04 (without pushbuttons).
LE2-D095, D125, D185, D255
LE1-D805, D955
LE2-D325, D405, D505, D655
LE3-D325
=
=
=
2xØ5.5
LE2-D805, D955
LE3-D405, D505
4xØ7.7
c
=
c1
=
=
=
165
122
165
165
=
=
307
165
307
260
280
4xØ7.7
=
=
165
257
c1
165
LE2-
c
c1
D095
132
135
LE1-Dkkk
c1
176
(2 pushbuttons “I” and “O”)
D125
132
135
LE1-DkkkkkA04
165
(without pushbuttons)
D185
144
147
LE2-Dkkk
169
(1 reset pushbutton “R”)
D255
144
147
LE3-Dkkk
165
(without pushbuttons)
LE3-D805
=
257
c1
Note: Dimensions are expressed in millimeters.
(mm X .0394 = inches)
(1) 190 for LE3-Dkkk (without pushbuttons).
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands (gland size in mm, P = Plastic)
325
=
Type of enclosure
At top
At bottom
LE1-D093, D094
LE1-D123, D124
LE2-D095, D125
2 x 13 P
2 x 13 P
LE1-D185, D188
LE1-D255, D258
LE2-D185, D255
1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P
2 x 16 P
LE2-D325, D405
1 x 13 P and 1 x 21 P
1 x 13 P and 2 x 21P
LE1-D325 to D655
LE2-D505, D655
1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P
1 x 13 P and 2 x 29P
LE1-D805, D955
LE2-D805, D955
1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P
1 x 13 P and 2 x 36P
LE3-D095, D125
1 x 16 P and 2 x 13 P
1 x 16 P and 2 x 13P
LE3-D185
1 x 21 P and 2 x 13 P
1 x 21 P and 2 x 16P
LE3-D325
1 x 21 P
1 x 21 P, 2 x 13 P and 2
x 16 P
LE3-D405
1 x 29 P
1 x 29 P, 2 x 13 P and 2
x 21 P
LE3-D505
1 x 36 P
1 x 36 P, 2 x 13 P and 2
x 29 P
LE3-D805
1 x 36 P
2 x 13 P and 3 x 36 P
325
350
457.5
400 (4)
=
=
=
4xM8x25
202
218
350
400
457.5
(4) + 14mm with blanking plugs.
134
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions
LEkD: International applications only
Enclosed D-Line starters with Fused Disconnect Switch
LE4-D096, D126, D186, D256
LE2-D096, D126, D186
LE3-D096, D126
=
=
2xØ5.5
c
=
c1
=
122
=
195
=
280
260
312
4xØ7.7
150
31
161 (1)
LE4-
c
c1
D09, D12
132
139
D18, D25
144
151
=
105
=
31
181
(1) 154 for LE2-Dkkk (1 reset pushbutton “R”).
LE4-D326, D406, D506, D656
=
=
LE2-D256, D326
LE3-D186, D326
4xØ7.7
H
=
=
H
b
b
4xØ7.7
c
c
=
G
c1 (1)
=
=
G
c1 (1)
=
31
a
31
a
LE2-
a
b
c
c1
G
H
LE3-
a
b
c
c1
G
H
LE4-
a
b
c
c1
G
H
D256
257
307
165
169
165
165
D186
257
307
165
165
165
165
D326
307
257
165
176
165
165
D326
287
367
190
194
195
225
D326
287
367
190
190
195
225
D406, 506,
656
367
287
190
201
225
195
(1) c1 = c for LE3-Dkkk (without pushbuttons).
LE2-D406, D506, D656, D806
LE3-D406, D506, D806
LE4-D806
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands
(gland size in mm, P = Plastic)
a-75
=
31
b-75
b-50
b+57.5
=
=
b (4)
(1) c1 = c for LE4-Dkkkkkk A04 (without pushbuttons).
=
4xM8x25
c
Type of
enclosure
At top
At bottom
LE4-D096, D126
2 x 13 P
2 x 13 P
LE4-D186, D256
1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P
2 x 16 P
LE2-D096 to D256
1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P
1 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
LE2-D326, D406
LE4-D326, D406
1 x 13 P and 1 x 21 P
1 x 13 P and 2 x 21 P
LE2-D506, D656
LE4-D506, D656
1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P
1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P
LE2-D806
LE4-D806
1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P
1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P
LE3-D096, D126
2 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P
2 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P
LE3-D186, D326
1 x 21 P
2 x 13 P, 2 x 16 P and 1 x 21 P
a-50
c1
a
a+57.5
(4) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.
LE3-D406
1 x 29 P
2 x 13 P, 2 x 21 P and 1 x 29 P
LE2-
a
b (4)
c
c1
LE3-D506
1 x 36 P
2 x 13 P, 2 x 29 P and 1 x 36 P
D406, D506, D656
300
400
202
218
LE3-D806
1 x 36 P
2 x 13 P and 3 x 36 P
D806
400
400
202
218
Note:
D406, D506
400
500
202
218
D806
500
700
253
269
400
400
202
218
LE3-
Dimensions are expressed in millimeters.
(mm X .0394 = inches)
LE4D806
135
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions
LEkK: International applications only
Enclosed K-Line starters without Fused Disconnect Switch
LE1-K06kkkA32, K09kkkA32
LE2-K06, K09
LE3-K06, K09
2xØ5.3
120
4xØ5.3
=
110
120
150
163
143
19
=
146
80
(1)
84
175
(1) For LE2
Enclosed K-Line starters with Fused Disconnect Switch
LE4-K06, K09
LE8-K06, K09
31
150
4xØ5.3
20
84
146
165
120
19
165
LE1-K06, K09 (except A32)
(1)
175
(1) For LE8
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands (gland size in mm, P = Plastic)
Type of enclosure
At top
At bottom
LE1-K
2 x 13 P
2 x 13 P
LE1-KkkA32
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
LE2-K
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
LE3
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
LE4, LE8-K
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
Note: Dimensions are expressed in millimeters.
(mm X .0394 = inches)
136
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Dimensions
LG1-K and LG1-D: International applications only
Starters without isolator
LG7-K06, K09, D12, D18
LG8-K06, K09, K12
4xØ5.3
(1)
(2)
150
4xØ5.3
165
150
120
165
LG1-K06, K09
LG1-D12, D18
84
120
165
146
175
177
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands
84
(3)
175
(1) Emergency stop for starters < 3 kW
Type of enclosure
At top
At bottom
(2) Emergency stop for starters ≥ 3 kW
LG1-K and LG1-D
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
(3) Only for LG7
LG7-K and LG7-D
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
LG8-K
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
Note: Dimensions are expressed in millimeters.
(mm X .0394 = inches)
137
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wiring diagrams
LE1-K and LE1-D: International applications only
Enclosed non-reversing K-Line starters
Q1/2
95
KM1/5
14
A1
6
W
N
– KM1
A2
4
V
O
A2 96
2
U
– KM1
I
13
6
5
14
4
3
O
– KM1
I
95
2
1
13
– KM1
96
L3
5
LE1-K06kkkA32, K09kkkA32
14
L2
3
LE1-K06, K09
13
L1
1
LE1-K06, K09
LE1-K06kkkA32, K09kkkA32
KM1/1
– KM1
A1
N
KM1/5
Enclosed non-reversing D-Line starters
LE1-D18 to D95
KM1/5
95
96
14
14
13 22
13
A1
13
14
N
A1
KM1/1
– KM1
l
– KM1
– KM1
A2
18
17
N
A2
A1
13
KM1/1
– KM1
O
– KM1
l
13
6
5
6
W
4
V
2
N
A2
4
3
14
– KM1
I
U
O
O
14
2
1
96
– KM1
95
KM1/5
95
KM1/5
LE1-DkkkkkA04, LE1-DkkkkkA05
21 96
LE1-D09 and D12
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
LE1-D09 to D95
LE1-DkkkkkA04
KM1/1
138
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wiring diagrams
LE2-K and LE2-D: International applications only
Enclosed reversing K-Line starters
Variant A05
95
KM2/5
95
KM2/5
L3
O
54
22
22
– KM1
21
N
– KM1
– KM2
A2
– KM2
(1)
A1
A1
A1
A1
– KM1
KM2/1
(1)
A2
V
(1)
A2
4
N
W 6
U
2
(1)
21
22
– KM2
21
22
– KM1
21
4
2
6
4
6
– KM2
5
3
2
– KM2
1
– KM2
54
– KM1
– KM1
Remote
Control
53 14
53
5
3
1
5
3
1
14
13
13
96
96
R
KM2/1
A2
L2
LE2-K06, K09
L1
LE2-K06, K09
(1) For the addition of 2 end of travel limit switches, with automatic stopping in either direction:
remove the connections 21/KM2 to A1/KM1 and 21/KM1 to A1/KM2
Enclosed reversing D-Line starters
L2
L3
5
21 96
3
5
1
95
L1
22
6
13
13
22
A1 21
14
22 (54)
– KM1
KM2/1
– KM2
A2
W
– KM1
A1 21
N
– KM2
A2
4
6
V
2
U
A1 21
– KM2
A2
– KM1
13
(53) 14
13
(53)
14
3
5
1
54
– KM1
– KM1
14
(54)
4
2
6
13
53 14
ll
– KM2
22
22 54
– KM2
– KM2
A2
W 6
4
V
l
A1 21
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
U
KM2/1
3
2
22
53
5
3
1
14
ll
– KM1
N
– KM2
O
13
6
4
2
l
– KM2
R
– KM1
O
4
– KM1
KM2/5
95
R
1
KM2/5
21 96
L3
LE2-D325 to D955
5
L2
3
1
L1
LE2-D095 to D255
( ) for LE2-D32
139
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wiring diagrams
LE4-K, LE4-D, LE8-K and LE2-D: International applications only
Across-the-line starters and starters for the control of distribution circuits
13
95 14
13
Q1
14
4
3
6
2
1
– KM1
I
Q1
– F1
95 14
Q1
– Q1
14
13
Q1/2
– F1
– KM1
13 22
14
13
A2
A1
Q1/6
– KM1
l
N
– KM1
A1
Q1/6
14
18
17
13
17
A1
N
– KM1
A2
6
A1
4
W
N
KM1/5
A2
2
V
14
18
95
– KM1
N
– KM1
l
– KM1
l
A2 96
3 4
5 6
1 2
O
U
96
96
5
– KM1
O
O
O
14
Q1/2
9
Q1
13
Q1/2 0
LE4-D80
LE4-DkkkkkA04, DkkkkkA05
21 96
Q1/2
LE4-D32 to D65
95
LE4-D09 to D25
13
LE4-K06, K09
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
LE4-K06, K09
LE4-D09 to D80
LE4-DkkkkkA04
Q1/1
Reversing starters
LE8-K06, K09
KM2/5
Variant A05
KM2/5
95
13
L3
L2
L1
LE8-K06, K09
R
– Q1
96
95 14
5
3
1
– Q1
13
53
22
21
22
21
N
– KM2
A2
(1)
A1
(1)
(1)
– KM1
KM2/1
– KM1
A1
(1)
– KM2
– KM1
– KM2
A2
22
54
22
– KM1
A2
4
2
W 6
V
U
– KM2
A1 21
5
3
1
54
– KM2
KM2/1
A2
– KM1
6
4
2
6
4
2
– KM2
N
Remote
Control
53 14
14
5
3
1
– KM1
A1 21
6
5
96
4
3
13
2
1
O
(1) For the addition of 2 end of travel limit switches, with automatic stopping in either direction: remove the connections 21/KM2
to A1/KM1 and 21/KM1 to A1/KM2
95
22
13
13
A1 21
N
Q1/6
13
(53)
14
(54)
22 14
(54)
– KM2
– KM1
A1 21
A1 21
– KM1
– KM2
A1 21
– KM1
– KM2
22
13
(53)
14
14
13
(53)
– KM1
– KM1
– KM2
A2
13
22 14
(54)
– KM2
– KM2
A2
Q1/6
ll
14
(54)
13
(53)
14
14
6
W
5
4
V
3
2
U
N
l
ll
– KM1
1
21 96
21 96
13
22
O
l
6
4
2
6
– KM2
4
– KM1
2
14
Q1
O
5
3
1
5
3
1
– Q1
13
– F1
A2
Q1
– F1
Q1/2
14
22
5/L3
6
13
A2
3/L2
LE2-D326 to D806
Q1/2
95
1/L1
4
LE2-D096 to D256
2
LE2-D096 to D806
( ) for LE2-D32.
140
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Wiring diagrams
LG1-K, LG1-D, LG7-K, LG7-D, LG8-K: International applications only
Across-the-line starters
LG1-K06, K09, D12, D18
380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7
L1/L3
L2/L2
L3/L1
LG1-K06, K09, D12, D18
Ph
KM1/1
13
13
T1
– KM1
– S1
14
14
5
T2
3
1
T3
– Q1
11
– Q2
4
6
3
5
A2
2
1
12
– S2
– KM1
KM1/5
W1 6
V1 4
U1 2
A1
– KM1
N
M1
3c
LG7-K09, D12, D18
LG7-K06, K09, D12, D18
380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7
KM1/1
– Q1
– Q1
– S1
14
14
– KM1
13
13
D2
D1
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
Ph
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
LG7-K06
11
E2
E1
– S2
12
5
W1 6
6
3
4
1
6
5
V1 4
4
3
U1 2
2
1
2
– F1
– KM1
A1
W1 6
V1 4
U1 2
A2
– KM1
– KM1
KM1/5
M
M1
3c
3c
N
Reversing starters
LG8-K06, K09, K12
380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7
KM2/5
11
D2
D1
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
Ph
5/L3
3/L2
LG8-K09, K12
1/L1
LG8-K06
– Q1
– S1
21
22
54
53
– KM2
A1
13
– S2
14
53
– KM1
A1
M
3c
02
54
13
14
– S2
– KM2
A2
– KM1
A2
U
M1
3c
22
21
– KM1
E2
E1
6
4
6
W
2
4
V
– KM2
5
6
5
3
4
3
1
2
2
U
4
6
2
4
V
W
2
10
– KM2
– KM1
6
– KM2
– KM1
1
5
6
5
3
4
3
1
2
1
12
– Q1
KM2/1
N
141
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Contactors -Definitions and comments
Altitude
The low oxygen atmosphere at high altitudes reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the rated
operational voltage of the contactor. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational
current of the contactor (unless the temperature drops at the same time).
No derating is necessary up to 3000 m.
Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current (AC supply) are as
follows.
Altitude
3500 m
4000 m
4500 m
5000 m
Rated operational voltage
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
Rated operational current
0.92
0.90
0.88
0.86
Ambient air temperature
The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The operating characteristics are
given:
- with no restriction for temperatures between -5 and +55 ˚C
- with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between -50 and +70 ˚C
Rated operational
current (Ie)
This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty, utilization category and
ambient temperature around the device.
Rated conventional
thermal current (Ith) c
The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its temperature rise exceeding
the limits given in the standards.
Permissible short
time rating
The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a short time after a period of no load, without dangerous
overheating.
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the use of the contactor
or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilization category are based. For 3-phase circuits it is
expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is less than or equal to
the rated insulation voltage Ui.
Rated control circuit
voltage (Uc)
The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based. For AC applications,
the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total harmonic distortion).
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to in dielectric tests
determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated
value given for each of them is not necessarily the same.
Rated impulse withstand
The peak value of a voltage surge which the device is able to withstand without breaking down.
voltage (Uimp)
Rated operational power
(expressed in kW)
The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor, at the stated operational voltage.
Rated breaking capacity
a
This is the current value which the contactor can break in accordance with the breaking conditions specified in the
IEC standard.
Rated making capacity a
This is the current value which the contactor can make in accordance with the making conditions specified in the
IEC standard.
On-load factor (m)
This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T)
m= t
T
Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current
t
T
Pole impedance
The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between the input terminal
and the output terminal.
The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component (X=Lω). The total impedance
therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz. This average value is given for the pole at its
rated operational current.
Electrical durability
This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can perform without
maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilization category, the rated operational current and the rated
operational voltage.
Mechanical durability
This is the average number of on-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the main poles) which the
contactor can perform without mechanical failure
c Conventional thermal current, in free air, conforming to IEC standards.
a For AC applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical
component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit,
the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical
component.
NOTE: these definitions are extracted from standard IEC 947-1.
142
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
7/98
D-Line Contactors, Overload Relays and Accessories
Contactors -Definitions and comments
143
7/98
© 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved
and
are registered trademarks of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
is a registered trademark of Canadian Standards Association
FINGERSAFE is a trademark of Square D Company
Seriplex is a trademark of Square D Company
Square D Company
8001 Hwy. 64 East
Knightdale, NC 27545
(919) 266-3671
Square D and
are registered trademarks of Square D Company.
Catalog No. 8502CT9704 July 1998 © 1998 Square D All Rights Reserved.